Yamaha Psr 530 Owners Manual

Psr-530-Owners-Manual yamaha-psr-530-owners-manual-133580

PSR-530 Owner's Manual PSR530E

PSR-530 to the manual 8cd22ab7-19a6-4e1d-ac65-1ace31298c5e

Yamaha Corporation PSR-530 Owner's Manual psr530e Yamaha Corporation - PSR-530 - Owner's Manual

2014-12-13

: Yamaha Psr-530-Owners-Manual yamaha-psr-530-owners-manual-133580 pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 130

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO
NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than
one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.
This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the
time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or
modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update
existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that
could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods
of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult
an audiologist.
IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before
damage occurs.

NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to a lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not
covered by the manufacturer’s warranty, and are therefore the owners
responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult your
dealer before requesting service.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be
aware of the following:

battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.
This product may also use “household” type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery
being charged.
When installing batteries, do not mix batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery
case rupture.

Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all
batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and
as regulated by the laws in your area. Note: Check with any retailer of
household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information.

Disposal Notice:
Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some
reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all
local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable
to assist you, please contact Yamaha directly.

NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model
number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this
plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the
date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual
as a permanent record of your purchase.

Model
Serial No.

Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of

92-BP

Purchase Date

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in
this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use
the product.

IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use
only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product
MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the
USA.

NOTE:
This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements
listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance
that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in
harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to
• This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America.

the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference
harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with
FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in
all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference,
which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try
to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:
• Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the
interference.
• Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
• In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna.
If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to
co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please
contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If
you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha
Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600
Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

PRECAUTIONS
PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING
* Please keep these precautions in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock,
short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not open the instrument or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or
modify them in any way. The instrument contains no user-serviceable parts.
If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and
have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Do not expose the instrument to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet
conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into
any openings.
• If the AC adaptor cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a
sudden loss of sound during use of the instrument, or if any unusual smells
or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power

switch, disconnect the adaptor plug from the outlet, and have the instrument inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.
• Use the specified adaptor (PA-6 or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha)
only. Using the wrong adaptor can result in damage to the instrument or
overheating.
• Before cleaning the instrument, always remove the electric plug from the
outlet. Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.
• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may
have accumulated on it.

CAUTION
Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the
instrument or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:
• Do not place the AC adaptor cord near heat sources such as heaters or
radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place
heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on,
trip over, or roll anything over it.
• When removing the electric plug from the instrument or an outlet, always
hold the plug itself and not the cord.
• Do not connect the instrument to an electrical outlet using a multiple-connector. Doing so can result in lower sound quality, or possibly cause overheating in the outlet.
• Unplug the AC power adaptor when not using the instrument, or during
electrical storms.
• Always make sure all batteries are inserted in conformity with the +/–
polarity markings. Failure to do so might result in overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage.
• Always replace all batteries at the same time. Do not use new batteries
together with old ones. Also, do not mix battery types, such as alkaline
batteries with manganese batteries, or batteries from different makers, or
different types of batteries from the same maker, since this can cause overheating, fire, or battery fluid leakage.

• Do not use the instrument near other electrical products such as televisions, radios, or speakers, since this might cause interference which can
affect proper operation of the other products.
• Do not place the instrument in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over.
• Before moving the instrument, remove all connected adaptor and other
cables.
• When cleaning the instrument, use a soft, dry cloth. Do not use paint
thinners, solvents, cleaning fluids, or chemical-impregnated wiping cloths.
Also, do not place vinyl or plastic objects on the instrument, since this might
discolor the panel or keyboard.
• Do not rest your weight on, or place heavy objects on the instrument, and
do not use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.
• Use only the stand specified for the instrument. When attaching the stand,
use the provided screws only. Failure to do so could cause damage to the
internal components or result in the instrument falling over.
• Do not operate the instrument for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you
experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

• Do not dispose of batteries in fire.
• Do not attempt to recharge batteries that are not intended to be charged.
• If the instrument is not to be in use for a long time, remove the batteries
from it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from the battery.
• Keep batteries away from children.
• Before connecting the instrument to other electronic components, turn off
the power for all components. Before turning the power on or off for all components, set all volume levels to minimum.
• Do not expose the instrument to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme
cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the
day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components.

■ SAVING USER DATA
• Save all data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer
MDF2, in order to help prevent the loss of important data due to a malfunction or user operating error.
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the instrument, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the instrument is not in use.
Make sure to discard used batteries according to local regulations.

(4)

Congratulations!
You are the proud owner of a fine electronic keyboard. The Yamaha PSR-530 PortaTone
combines the most advanced tone generation technology with state-of-the-art digital electronics
and features to give you stunning sound quality with maximum musical enjoyment. A large graphic
display and easy-to-use interface also greatly enhance the operability of this advanced instrument.
In order to make the most of your PortaTone’s features and extensive performance potential,
we urge you to read the manual thoroughly while trying out the various features described. Keep
the manual in a safe place for later reference.

Important Features
One Touch Setting feature automatically
selects appropriate voice, effect, and other settings for the selected accompaniment style — all
you have to do is select a style and play.

Touch-sensitive 61-key keyboard for a wide
range of dynamic musical expression.

An outstanding range of 200 panel voices
and 12 drum kits, plus a full set of 480 XG voices.

and51Pno1
VOICE R1

VOICE R2

Voice set feature automaticaly selects the
appropriate voice parameter settings for the panel
voices.

Advanced auto-accompaniment technology gives you 100 fully-orchestrated accompaniment “styles” to back up what you play on the
keyboard.

Virtual Arranger feature lets you add chord
progressions to any of the auto-accompaniment
styles for more musical, refined accompaniment.

Large multi-function LCD display panel
makes it easy to select and edit parameters.

N
ATIO
STR
I
G
RE

Registration Memory saves your favorite
panel settings for instant recall when needed.

Digital effects add depth and ambience to
your sound.

Minus-one and Repeat functions are ideal
for learning new songs and polishing your keyboard technique.

Song recording feature lets you record
four melody tracks with an accompaniment track.

Optional Yamaha Music Cartridges can be
plugged in for enjoyable automated performance,
keyboard practice, and extra accompaniment
styles.

Create original accmpaniment styles with
the User Style feature.
Built-in amplifier and speaker system delivers top-quality sound without the need for external equipment.

AD
TI P
MUL

Multi Pads record and play short rhythmic
and melodic sequences that can be used to add
impact and variety to your performances.
A range of MIDI functions for expanded
musical enjoyment (General MIDI System Level
1 and Yamaha XG compatible).

GM System Level 1
“GM System Level 1” is an addition to the MIDI
standard which ensures that any GM-compatible music
data can be accurately played by any GM-compatible
tone generator, regardless of manufacturer. The GM
mark is affixed to all software and hardware products that
support the “GM System Level 1”.
PSR-530 supports GM System Level 1.

XG
XG is a new MIDI format created by Yamaha which
significantly improves and expands upon the “GM System Level 1” standard by providing a greater variety of
high-quality voices plus considerably enhanced effect
operation while being fully compatible with GM.
PSR-530 supports the XG format.

◆ Packing List
• PSR-530

• Music Cartridge

• Music Stand

• Owner’s manual

Contents
Panel Controls

The Music Stand .................................................... 7

Basic Display Operation

The Display Icons ............................................................ 8
The Menus ..................................................................... 10
Shortcuts ............................................................. 11

Setting Up

Power Supply ................................................................. 12
Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor ................... 12
Using Batteries ...................................................... 12
Connections .................................................................. 13
The PHONES Jack ................................................ 13
SUSTAIN Jack ....................................................... 13
The AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks ........................ 13
MIDI IN/OUT and TO HOST Connectors ............... 13

Digital Effects

Reverb ............................................................................36
Turning the Reverb Effect On or Off ............................ 36
Selecting a Reverb Type .............................................. 37
Reverb Return Level ....................................................38
Chorus ............................................................................38
Turning the Chorus Effect On or Off ............................ 38
Selecting a Chorus Effect ............................................ 39
Chorus Return Level ...................................................39
DSP .................................................................................40
Turning the DSP Effect On or Off ................................ 41
Selecting a DSP Effect ................................................ 41
DSP Return Level ........................................................42
Harmony .........................................................................42
Turning the Harmony Effect On or Off ......................... 43
Selecting a Harmony Type .......................................... 43
Adjusting the Harmony Volume ................................... 44

The Pitch Bend Wheel

Setting the Pitch Bend Range ...................................... 45

The Demonstration

Transpose
Playing the PSR-530

The PSR-530 Voices ...................................................... 16
A Word About the “R1”, “R2”, and “L” Voices .......... 16
Selecting & Playing Voices ........................................... 17
Keyboard Percussion ............................................ 19
The Dual Voice Mode ..................................................... 19
The Split Voice Mode ..................................................... 20
Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point ....................... 21

Setting Transposition ....................................................46

Registration Memory

Using Auto Accompaniment ........................................ 22
The Synchro Stop Function ................................... 26
Using Virtual Arranger .................................................. 27
Accompaniment Track Muting ..................................... 27
Muting Individual Tracks ........................................ 28
Accompaniment Volume Control ................................. 28
Changing the Accompaniment Split Point .................. 29
Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
and SPLIT VOICE Split Points .......................... 30
The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes .............. 30
The Stop Accompaniment Function ....................... 34
One Touch Setting ......................................................... 34

Registering the Panel Settings .................................... 47
Recall the Registered Panel Settings .......................... 48
The Accompaniment Freeze Function ........................ 48

The Multi Pads
Auto Accompaniment

Selecting a MULTI PAD Set ........................................... 49
Playing the MULTI PADs ............................................... 50
Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On/Off ............ 51

Song Playback

Song Playback Procedure ............................................ 52
Song Volume Control ....................................................53
Play from a Specified Measure .................................... 54
Minus-one Practice .......................................................55
Minus-one Track Assignment ...................................... 55
Repeat Play ....................................................................57

Song Recording

Song Recording Procedure .......................................... 59
About the Recording with
the Digital Effects Applied ................................ 62
Clearing Song Data ....................................................... 63
Clearing an Entire Song .............................................. 63
Clearing Selected Melody Tracks ................................ 63

Style Recording

Style Recording Procedure .......................................... 64
Drum Cancel ............................................................... 68
Quantize ...................................................................... 69
Clearing User Style Data .............................................. 70
Clearing an Entire Style .............................................. 70
Clearing Selected Style Tracks .................................... 70

Multi Pad Recording

MUTI PAD Recording Procedure .................................. 71
Clearing MULTI PAD Data ............................................. 74
Clearing an Entire Pad Set .......................................... 74
Clearing Selected MULTI PADs ................................... 74

Using Music Cartridges

Inserting a Music Cartridge ................................... 75
Music Cartridge Handling Precautions ................... 75
Cartridge Songs ............................................................ 76
Cartridge Song Playback ............................................ 76
Cartridge Accompaniment Styles ............................... 77

Revoicing

Revoicing the R1, R2, and L Voices ............................. 78
Revoicing a Style ........................................................... 80
Revoicing a User Song ................................................. 81

Overall Functions

MIDI Functions

What’s MIDI? .................................................................. 86
MIDI Terminal/TO HOST Terminal ....................... 88
What You Can Do with MIDI .......................................... 88
Connecting to a Personal Computer
(TO HOST Terminal/HOST SELECT Switch) ............ 90
Connect using the PSR-530 MIDI terminals .......... 90
Connect using the TO HOST terminal ................... 91
The PSR-530 MIDI Functions ....................................... 92
Transmit Channel & Transmit Track ........................ 92
Receive Channel & Receive Mode ....................... 93
Local Control ......................................................... 94
Clock ...................................................................... 94
Bulk Data Send ...................................................... 95
Initial Data Send .................................................... 95

Appendix
PSR-530 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure ........... 96
Data Backup & Initialization ......................................... 98
Data Backup .......................................................... 98
Data Initialization ................................................... 98
Voice List ....................................................................... 99
Maximum Polyphony ............................................. 99
Drum Kit List ................................................................ 104
About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP) ............. 106
When DSP type Is
Selected as a System Effect ............................ 106
When DSP type Is
Selected as a Insertion Effect .......................... 107
Troubleshooting .......................................................... 109
MIDI Data Format ......................................................... 110
MIDI Implementation Chart ........................................ 122
Specifications .............................................................. 124
Index ............................................................................. 125

Touch Sensitivity .................................................... 84
Pitch Bend Range ................................................. 84
Master Tuning ........................................................ 84
Scale Tuning .......................................................... 84
Song Transpose ..................................................... 85
Metronome ............................................................ 85
Split Voice Split Point ............................................. 85
Accompaniment Split Point .................................... 85
Fingering Mode ..................................................... 85
Voice Set ............................................................... 85

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Panel Controls
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
■ Top Panel Controls

q STAND BY/ON Switch ................................. page 14
8BEAT
1 8BEAT POP 1
2 8BEAT POP 2
3 8BT UPTEMPO
4 8BT STANDARD
5 FOLKROCK
6 POP ROCK 1
7 POP ROCK 2
8 8BEAT MEDIUM
9 8BEAT BALLAD
10 EPIC BALLAD
11 PIANO BALLAD
16BEAT
12 16BEAT POP
13 16BT SHUFFLE 1
14 16BT SHUFFLE 2
15 16BT BALLAD 1
16 16BT BALLAD 2
17 16BT BALLAD 3
18 FUNK 1
19 SOUL BALLAD
20 FUSION BALLAD
6/8 BALLAD
21 SLOW ROCK 1

w MASTER VOLUME Control ......................... page 14
e DEMO Button ............................................... page 14
r TEMPO Buttons ........................................... page 23
t TRANSPOSE Buttons .................................. page 46

Buttons ................................................. pages 28, 53

62 MARIACHI
63 TEJANO
64 CUMBIA
TRAD JAZZ
65 SWING
66 B B SWING
67 B B BALLAD
68 JAZZ QUARTET
69 DIXIELAND
CONTEMP JAZZ
70 COOL JAZZ
71 JAZZ BALLAD
72 JAZZ WALTZ
73 FUSION
LATIN
74 BOSSA NOVA 1
75 BOSSA NOVA 2
76 BOSSA NOVA 3
77 SALSA
78 SAMBA
79 MAMBO
80 BEGUINE
81 MERENGUE

r !0

DIGITAL EFF

TEMPO

REVERB

TRANSPOSE

CHORUS

ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME

DSP

ON/
OFF

u AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SECTION
• AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
ON/OFF Button ......................................... page 23
• SYNC STOP Button .................................. page 26
• SYNC START Button ................................ page 24
• INTRO Button ........................................... page 24
• MAIN/AUTO FILL A & B Buttons ............... page 24
• ENDING Button......................................... page 26

MASTER

VOLUME

42 FUNK 2
43 SOUL
44 GOSPEL SHUFFLE
45 6/8 GOSPEL
46 4/4 BLUES
ROCK & ROLL
47 ROCK&ROLL 1
48 ROCK&ROLL 2
49 BOOGIE
50 TWIST
C&W
51 BLUEGRASS 1
52 BLUEGRASS 2
53 COUNTRY 2/4
54 8BT COUNTRY
55 COUNTRY ROCK
56 COWBOY BOOG
57 C BALLAD
58 C SHUFFLE
59 C WALTZ
AMERICAS
60 CAJUN
61 BANDA

STAND BY
ON

y ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME

22 SLOW ROCK 2
23 6/8 BALLAD
DANCE
24 DANCE POP 1
25 DANCE POP 2
26 TECHNO
27 EUROBEAT
28 EURO HOUSE
29 HIP HOP
30 SYNTH BOOGIE
DISCO
31 70S DISCO
32 DISCO TROP
33 POLKA POP
ROCK
34 8BT ROCK BLD
35 16BT ROCK BLD
36 HARD ROCK
37 ROCK SHUFFLE
38 6/8HVY ROCK
39 US ROCK
40 16BEAT ROCK
RHYTHM & BLUES
41 R&B

SYNC
MIN

SYNC

MAIN/AUTO FILL

INTRO

STOP START

MAX

AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT
CLICK

36
C1

T 37

38
D1

S 39

40
E1

R 41

L 43

L 45

M 47

H 48

M 50

H 52

L 53

B
54

H 55

i RECORD Button ............................ pages 59, 65, 71
o START/STOP Button...................... pages 15, 24, 26
!0 DIGITAL EFFECT SECTION
•
•
•
•
•

REVERB Button ........................................ page 36
CHORUS Button ....................................... page 38
DSP Button ............................................... page 41
VARIATION Button .................................... page 41
HARMONY Button .................................... page 43

!1 DISPLAY & RELATED CONTROLS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

DISPLAY ..................................................... page 8
MENU Buttons .......................................... page 10
SUB MENU Buttons .................................. page 10
VOICE Button ........................................... page 10
STYLE Button ........................................... page 10
SONG Button ............................................ page 10
CARTRIDGE Button ................................. page 10
REVOICE Button ...................................... page 78
TRACK Buttons............... pages 19, 20, 28, 60, 79

!2 REGISTRATION MEMORY SECTION
• MEMORY Button ....................................... page 48
• 1, 2, 3, 4 Buttons ....................................... page 48
• FREEZE Button ........................................ page 48

!3 ONE TOUCH SETTING Button .................... page 35
!4 NUMBER Buttons ........................................ page 17
!5 + and – Buttons .................................... pages 15, 17
!6 Data Dial ...................................................... page 18

TO HOST

!7 MUSIC CARTRIDGE Slot ............................ page 75
!8 KEYBOARD SECTION
• DUAL VOICE Button ................................. page 19
• SPLIT VOICE Button ................................ page 20

!9 MULTI PAD SECTION
• STOP Button ............................................. page 50
• 1, 2, 3, 4 Buttons ............................... pages 50, 72

@0 Keyboard ...................................................... page 18
@1 PITCH BEND Wheel .................................... page 45
@2 PHONES Jack ............................................. page 13

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Panel Controls

82 BOLERO LENTO
83 ESPAGNOLE
CARIBBEAN
84 REGGAE 12
85 POP REGGAE
BALLROOM LATIN
86 CHA CHA
87 RHUMBA
88 PASODOBLE
89 TANGO
BALLROOM STD
90 FOXTROT
91 JIVE
MARCH & WALTZ
92 MARCH 1
93 MARCH 2
94 6/8 MARCH
95 POLKA
96 STANDARD WALTZ
97 POP WALTZ
98 GERMAN WALTZ
99 VIEN WALTZ
100 MUSETTE

1 ~ 18
19 ~ 30
31 ~ 57
58 ~ 73
74 ~ 88
89 ~ 100
101 ~ 118
119 ~ 126
127 ~ 140
141 ~ 155
156 ~ 163
164 ~ 181
182 ~ 200

001 GrandPno
76

VOICE L

REGIST
MEMORY

116
MULTI PAD

HARMONY

MIDI

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

101

VOICE R1

ONE TOUCH

SETTING
FREEZE
MEASURE
REGISTRATION
MULTI PAD

TEMPO

DSP

VOICE R2

B
REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

CHORUS

FECT

PANEL VOICE

VARIATION

BASS

SYNC
STOP
CHORD
1

201 ~ 212 DRUM KITS

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

VOICE

SPLIT

REGIST BANK

MULTI PAD STOP

MULTI PAD SET

REVERB
CHORUS
HARMONY
DSP
VARIATION

REVERB TYPE
CHORUS TYPE
HARMONY TYPE
DSP TYPE
DSP TYPE

ACMP ON / OFF

FINGERING

DUAL VOICE
SPLIT VOICE

REVOICE R2
REVOICE L

VOICE

OVERALL
MINUS ONE

REGIST MEMORY

PHRASE
2

SONG
VOICE

SHORTCUT

PIANO
CHROMATIC PERCUSSION
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRINGS
ENSEMBLE
BRASS
REED
PIPE
SYNTH LEAD
SYNTH PAD
SYNTH EFFECTS
ETHNIC
PERCUSSIVE
SOUND EFFECTS
SFX

PRESS AND HOLD FOR A WHILE.

DIGITAL
EFFECT
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

213 ~ 251
252 ~ 271
272 ~ 307
308 ~ 336
337 ~ 378
379 ~ 390
391 ~ 424
425 ~ 456
457 ~ 469
470 ~ 477
478 ~ 513
514 ~ 542
543 ~ 598
599 ~ 619
620 ~ 642
643 ~ 651
652 ~ 692

STYLE

mM 7

FINGERING

VOICE

XG VOICE

PIANO
CHROMATIC PERCUSSION
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
SOLO STRINGS
ENSEMBLE
SOLO BRASS
BRASS ENSEMBLE
REED
PIPE
SYNTH LEAD
SYNTH PAD

DUAL

ARMONY

KEYBOARD

DUAL VOICE

START/STOP
/

REVOICE

ENDING

1
56

L 57

M 59
L

M 60
H

••••••••••••••••

HOST SELECT

PC-1
Mac

C 61
1

MIDI • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
OUT

!5
REGISTRATION MEMORY

2
H 62

R 63
1

3
64
E3

R 65

FREEZE

YES

MUTLI PAD

STOP

4
66

SPLIT VOICE

0
NO

TRACK

S 67

1
C 69
2 A3

R 71
2

!3
H 72

L 73

74
D4

H 75

•••••••••

SUSTAIN

L 76

2
H 77

AUX OUT • • • • • • • • •
L/L+R

L 78

H 79

L 80

PSR-530

4
81
A4

H 83

L 84

86
D5

H 88

L 89

91
G5

93
A5

95
B5

96
C6

DC IN 10-12V

PC-2
MIDI

■ Rear Panel Controls
@3 TO HOST Connector .................................... page 88

◆ The Music Stand

@4 HOST SELECT Switch ................................. page 90
@5 MIDI IN and OUT Connectors ...................... page 88
@6 SUSTAIN Jack ............................................. page 13
@7 AUX OUT R, L/L+R Jacks ............................ page 13
@8 DC IN 10-12V Jack ...................................... page 12

The PSR-530 is supplied with a music stand
that can be attached to the instrument by inserting it into the slot at the rear of the control panel.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Basic Display Operation
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-530 LCD panel is a large multi-function type that simultaneously displays and
provides access to a number of important parameters. Basic operation of the display as well
as the MENU and SUB MENU buttons, and the meaning of the icons which appear in the
display, are summarized briefly below.

The Display Icons
CART (Cartridge)
Appears when a Music Cartridge song or
style is selected (page 76).
XG
Appears when one of the PSR-530’s XG
voices is selected (page 16).

REVERB
Appears when the REVERB effect is turned on (page 36).
HARMONY
Appears when the HARMONY
effect is turned on (page 43).
CHORUS
Appears when the CHORUS effect is turned on (page 38).

TRANSPOSE
The current transpose value
(page 46).

116

TEMPO
Shows the current tempo of accompaniment/song playback
(page 23).
DSP
Appears when the DSP effect is
turned on (page 41).

DSP VARIATION
Appears when the DSP efDSP VARIATION
fect variation is turned on
(page 41).

VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

VOICE R1

VOICE L, VOICE R2, and VOICE R1
The currently selected L (Left-hand), R2 (Right-hand
2) and R1 (Right-hand 1) voice numbers are displayed in these display locations (page 16).

001 GrandPno
76

VOICE L

116
CHORUS

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

VARIATION

BASS

2
SYNC
STOP
CHORD
1

MEASURE

MULTI PAD

mM 7

FINGERING
CHORD
2

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

MINUS ONE

VOICE R1

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

FREEZE
REGISTRATION

TEMPO

DSP

101

B
REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

HARMONY

VOICE R2

PAD

VOICE

L
SPLIT

PHRASE
1

VOICE

PHRASE
2

VOICE

R1
DUAL

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Basic Display Operation

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

ONE TOUCH SETTING
Appears when the ONE TOUCH SETTING feature is engaged (page 34).

MEASURE
Indicates the current measure number during song recording and playback (page 54).

SYNC STOP
Appears when the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT SYNC STOP function
is engaged (page 26).

FREEZE
Appears when the REGISTRATION
MEMORY “FREEZE” function is on
(page 48).

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BEAT
Flashes at the current tempo and
indicates the current beat during
accompaniment and song playback.
(page 25)

REGISTRATION 1 … 4
(Registration Memory)
Indicates the currently selected REGISTRATION MEMORY or ONE
TOUCH SETTING number (page 47).

FREEZE

REPEAT
Indicates the “A” and “B” repeat points
when programming a repeat section,
and whether REPEAT PLAY is on or
off (page 57).

MULTI PAD 1 … 4
Indicates the currently playing MULTI
PAD number (page 50).

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

MINUS ONE

PAD

VOICE

PHRASE
1

VOICE

SPLIT

PHRASE
2

FINGERING
Shows the currently selected fingering mode (page 30).

mM 7

CHORD
Displays the current chord name
during AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
playback or SONG recording/playback (page 25).

ACCOMPANIMENT TRACKS
The top row of 8 icons light to indicate which of the 8 possible
accompaniment tracks are being used for accompaniment playback. They are also used to specify tracks when using the
REVOICE function (page 27).

DUAL

VOLUME
These icons show the volume (actually velocity) of each accompaniment track during accompaniment playback, the volume of
the melody and accompaniment tracks during song playback, and
the volume of the R1, R2 and L voices (page 16).

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

MINUS ONE

PAD

VOICE

L
SPLIT

PHRASE
1

VOICE

PHRASE
2

VOICE

R1
DUAL

MELODY TRACKS 1 … 4, ACCOMPANIMENT TRACK
These icons indicate the playback on/off status of each song
track, and are used to specify tracks for song recording (page 60).
They are also used to specify tracks when using the REVOICE
function (page 81).
VOICE L, VOICE R2, VOICE R1
These icons indicate the on/off status of the L, R2, and R1 voices
when the DUAL VOICE and/or SPLIT VOICE functions are used
(page 16). They are also used to specify tracks when using the
REVOICE function (page 79).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Basic Display Operation

The Menus

The buttons to the right of the display directly select one of the PSR-530’s
four main function menus: VOICE, STYLE, SONG, and CARTRIDGE. The
currently selected menu is indicated by a triangular indicator in the display
next to the menu list printed immediately to the right of the display panel.
In addition to the menus and functions which are available directly via the
PSR-530 panel controls, there is also a range of important “background”
functions which can be selected via the MENU and SUB MENU [▲] and
[▼] buttons.

001 GrandPno
76

VOICE L

REGIST
MEMORY

HARMONY

CHORUS

MIDI

FREEZE
REGISTRATION

TEMPO

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

101

VOICE R1

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
MULTI PAD

VOICE R2

VARIATION

BASS

2
SYNC
STOP
CHORD
1

MEASURE

VOICE

MULTI PAD

STYLE

mM 7

FINGERING
CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

SONG
DIGITAL
EFFECT
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

OVERALL
MINUS ONE

SPLIT

DUAL

The MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons are used to select the menu: REGISTRATION MEMORY, MULTI PAD, MIDI, DIGITAL EFFECT, or OVERALL. The
currently selected MENU category is indicated by a triangular indicator in
the display next to the menu list printed immediately to the left of the
display panel. All of the listed menu categories can be selected by
pressing either the MENU [▲] or [▼] button as many times as necessary
until the triangular indicator in the display appears next to the name of the
desired category. Once a MENU has been selected, the SUB MENU [▲]
and [▼] buttons can be used to select the desired function. The SUB
MENU functions will be described in detail in the appropriate chapters
throughout this manual.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Basic Display Operation

Shortcuts
To make operation as easy and as efficient as possible, the PSR-530 features a
number of “shortcuts” which allow you to jump directly to certain functions without
having to use the MENU and SUB MENU buttons. All of these shortcuts work in the
same way: press and hold a panel button for a few seconds to go to the related function.
For example, if you press and hold the [REVERB] button for a few seconds, you will
go directly to the REVERB type selection function. The shortcut buttons and the
functions they access are listed on the PSR-530 panel, near the upper left corner of the
display. The shorcuts will also be described where appropriate throughout this manual.

REVERB

Reverb

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Setting Up
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
This section contains information about setting up your PSR-530 and preparing to play. Be
sure to go through this section carefully before using your PSR-530.

Power Supply
Although the PSR-530 will run either from an optional AC adaptor or batteries,
Yamaha recommends use of the more environmentally safe AC adaptor. Follow
the instructions below according to the power source you intend to use.

• Never interrupt the power
supply (e.g. remove the
batteries or unplug the
AC adaptor) during any
PSR-530 record operation! Doing so can result
in a loss of data.

■ Using An Optional AC Power Adaptor
z Plug an optional Yamaha PA-6 Power Adaptor into a wall AC outlet.
x Then plug the DC output cable from the PA-6 into the DC IN 10-12V jack on
the rear panel of the PSR-530. The internal batteries are automatically
disconnected when an AC Power Adaptor is used.
DC IN 10-12V

PA-6

When turning the power OFF, simply reverse the procedure.

• Use ONLY a Yamaha PA-6
AC Power Adaptor (or
other adaptor specifically
recommended by
Yamaha) to power your
instrument from the AC
mains. The use of other
adaptors may result in irreparable damage to both
the adaptor and the PSR530.
• Unplug the AC Power
Adaptor when not using
the PSR-530, or during
electrical storms.

■ Using Batteries
For battery operation the PSR-530 requires six 1.5V SUM-1, “D” size, R-20 or
equivalent batteries.
When the batteries need to be replaced “LoBattry” may appear on top of the
display, the volume may be reduced, the sound may be distorted, and other
problems may occur. When this happens, turn the power off and replace the
batteries.
Replace the batteries as follows:
z Open the battery compartment cover located on the instrument’s bottom panel.
x Insert the six new batteries, being careful to follow the polarity markings on
the inside of the compartment.
c Replace the compartment cover, making sure that it locks firmly in place.

• When the batteries run
down, replace them with a
complete set of six new
batteries. NEVER mix old
and new batteries.
• Do not use different kinds
of batteries (e.g. alkaline
and manganese) at the
same time.
• If the instrument is not to
be in use for a long time,
remove the batteries from
it, in order to prevent possible fluid leakage from
the battery.
• Plugging or unplugging
the AC power adaptor
while the batteries are installed will reset the PSR530 to the defaults.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Setting Up

Connections
■ The PHONES Jack
A standard pair of stereo headphones can be plugged in here for private practice or
late-night playing. The internal stereo speaker system is automatically shut off when
a pair of headphones is plugged into the PHONES jack.

■ SUSTAIN Jack
An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch can be plugged into the rear-panel
SUSTAIN jack for sustain control. The footswitch functions like the damper pedal on
a piano — press for sustain, release for normal sound.

SUSTAIN

■ The AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks

• Be sure that you do
not press the footswitch while turning
the power on. If you
do, the ON/OFF status
of the footswitch will
be reversed.
• Some voices may
sound continuously or
have a long decay after the notes have
been released while
the sustain pedal
(footswitch) is held.

The rear-panel AUX OUT R and L/L+R jacks deliver the output of the PSR-530
for connection to a keyboard amplifier, stereo sound system, a mixing console, or tape
recorder. If you will be connecting the PSR-530 to a monaural sound system, use only
the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the left- and rightchannel signals are combined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so you don’t lose any
of the PSR-530 sound.
AUX OUT
•••••••••

•••••••••

L/L+R

Stereo
System

■ MIDI IN/OUT and TO HOST Connectors
See page 88.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
The Demonstration
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Once you’ve set up your PSR-530, try listening to the pre-programmed demonstration songs.
A total of 12 demo songs are provided.

1 Switch ON
Turn the power ON by pressing the [STAND BY/ON] switch.
STAND BY
ON

• Even when the switch is in
the “STAND BY” position,
electricity is still flowing to
the instrument at the minimum level. When you are not
using the PSR-530 for a long
time, make sure you unplug
the AC power adoptor from
the wall AC outlet, and/or remove the batteries from the
instrument.

2 Set an Initial Volume Level
Turn the [MASTER VOLUME] control up (clockwise) about a quarter-turn
from its minimum position. You can re-adjust the [MASTER VOLUME]
control for the most comfortable overall volume level after playback begins.
MASTER

VOLUME

MIN

• If you play the PSR-530 with
the volume at its maximum
level when the batteries are
used, the life of the batteries
will be shorter.

MAX

3 Press the [DEMO] Button
Press the [DEMO] button to start demo playback. The PSR-530 SONG
menu will automatically be selected and the number and name of the first demo
song will appear on the top line of the display. The demo will begin playing
automatically. The demo songs will play in sequence, and the sequence will
repeat until stopped.

01 PeterGun

• You can play along on the
PSR-530 keyboard while the
demonstration is playing.
• The volume icons will move in
response to the data in each
track while the demonstration
plays.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The Demonstration

4 Skip to the Beginning Of a Different Demo Song

While the demonstration is playing you can select any of the demo songs by
using the [–] and [+] buttons. Playback will skip to the beginning of the selected
song.

02 R&B

0
NO

YES

5 Stop When Done
Press the [DEMO] button or the [START/STOP] button to stop demo playback.

START/STOP
/

• Demo playback can be restarted after it has been
stopped by pressing the
[START/STOP] button. In
this case the selected
demo song will play
through to the end and
then playback will stop automatically.
• Since playing the demo
automatically selects the
SONG menu, the SONG
menu will remain active
when demo playback is
stopped. To select and
play voices after stopping
the demo, for example,
you will have to press the
[VOICE] button to go to
the VOICE menu. The
same applies for other
menus.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Playing the PSR-530
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-530 Voices
The PSR-530 actually includes two voice sets: the “panel” voices and percussion
kits, and the XG voices. The panel voices include 200 “pitched” voices (voice
numbers 1 through 200) and 12 percussion kits (numbers 201 through 212), while the
XG voice set includes 480 voices (voice numbers 213 through 692).
Panel voices

1 … 200

Panel drum kits

201 … 212

XG voices

213 … 692

See the “Voice List” on page 99.

■ A Word About the “R1”, “R2”, and “L” Voices
The PSR-530 allows up to three voices to be selected at the same time: “R1” (Righthand 1), “R2”, (Right-hand 2) and “L” (Left-hand). Only the “R1” voice is used when
you’re playing a single voice over the entire range of the keyboard. When you’re using
the DUAL VOICE and/or SPLIT VOICE modes (decribed on pages 19 and 20),
however, the “R2” and/or “L” voice will be used as well. The numbers of the currently
selected R1, R2, and L voices are all shown on the display panel.
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

VOICE R1

1
VOICE

VOICE

SPLIT

DUAL

R1 Voice

VOICE

SPLIT

VOICE

R1
DUAL

R1 Voice + R2 Voice

VOICE

SPLIT

L Voice

VOICE

R1
DUAL

R1 Voice

VOICE

L
SPLIT

VOICE

R1
DUAL

R1 Voice + R2 Voice
L Voice
(Split Voice Mode + Dual Voice Mode)

The R2 and L voices will be discussed in more detail in the DUAL VOICE and
SPLIT VOICE sections. For now we’ll describe how to select and play the main R1
voice.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Playing the PSR-530

Selecting & Playing Voices
Here’s how you can select and play the panel voices.

1 Select the VOICE Menu
Press the [VOICE] button so that the triangular indicator appears in the display next
to “VOICE” to the right of the display. The number and name of the currently selected
“R1” voice appears on the top line of the display panel when the VOICE menu is
selected.

001 GrandPno
VOICE R1

1
VOICE

2 Select a Panel Voice
The PSR-530 voices can be selected by using the [–] and [+] buttons, the number
buttons, the data dial, or the [VOICE] button.
● The [–] and [+] Buttons
When the VOICE menu is selected these buttons step up or down through the PSR530’s voices. Press either button briefly to step to the next voice in the corresponding direction, or hold the button to scroll rapidly through the voices in the
corresponding direction.
7

002 BritePno
VOICE R1

YES

● The Number Buttons
The number buttons can be used to directly enter the number of the desired voice,
thereby immediately selecting that voice without having to step through a number
of other voices. To select voice number 109 (TremoloStrs), for example, press the
[1], [0], and [9] number buttons in sequence.

109 Trem.Str
VOICE R1

109

0
NO

YES

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Playing the PSR-530

One- or two-digit voice numbers can be entered without leading zeros. To select
voice number “23” (SteelDrums), for example, simply press the [2] button and then
the [3] button. The bars below the voice number on the display will flash for a few
seconds, and then disappear when the selected voice number has been recognized
by the PSR-530.

023 SteelDrm
VOICE R1

0
NO

YES

One- or two-digit voice numbers can also be entered with leading zeroes: e.g. “23”
can be entered as “023” by pressing the [0], [2], and [3] buttons. In this case the
specified voice number will be immediately recognized by the PSR-530.
● The Data Dial
Simply rotate the dial clockwise to increment the voice number, or counterclockwise to decrement the voice number.

● The [VOICE] Button
Pressing the [VOICE] button increments the voice number. Press briefly to
increment by one, or hold for continuous incrementing.

VOICE

3 Play & Adjust Volume
You can now play the selected voice on the PSR-530 keyboard. Use the [MASTER
VOLUME] control to adjust the overall volume level.
If the Voice Set function (page 85) is turned “on”, whenever a panel voice is selected
appropriate “R2” and “L” voices (i.e. DUAL VOICE and SPLIT VOICE modes) as
well as digital effects, etc., will be automatically selected at the same time.
MASTER

VOLUME

• The PSR-530’s XG
voices are selected in
the same way as the
panel voices, as described above.
• When a XG voice is
selected the XG icon
will appear below the
voice number.
• Refer to page 99 for a
complete list of the
panel and XG voices.

MIN

MAX

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Playing the PSR-530

◆ Keyboard Percussion
When one of the 12 panel DRUM KIT voices are selected (voice numbers 201
through 212) you can play different drums and percussion instruments on the
keyboard. The drums and percussion instruments played by the various keys are
marked by symbols above the keys.

201 Std.Kit1
VOICE R1

201
VOICE

● The Drum Kits
201

Standard Kit1

207

Dance Kit

202

Standard Kit2

208

Jazz Kit

203

Room Kit

209

Brush Kit

204

Rock Kit

210

Classic Kit

205

Electronic Kit

211

SFX Kit 1

206

Analog Kit

212

SFX Kit 2

• The HARMONY effect
(page 42) cannot be
turned on while a
drum kit is selected
for the “R1” voice, and
will automatically be
turned off if a drum kit
is selected while
HARMONY is on.
• The TRANSPOSE parameter (page 46) has
no effect on the drum
kit voices.
• See page 104 for a
complete listing of the
keyboard percussion
drum instrument assignments.

The Dual Voice Mode
When the DUAL VOICE mode is engaged you can play two voices (the R1 and R2
voices) simultaneously across the entire keyboard.
The DUAL VOICE mode is turned on and off by pressing the [DUAL VOICE]
button. When the DUAL VOICE mode is turned on both R1 and R2 icons in the display
will light. Press the [DUAL VOICE] button a second time to turn the DUAL VOICE
mode off: the R2 icon in the display will go out leaving only the R1 icon lit.
VOICE

VOICE

• The R1/R2 voice settings can be changed
as required by using
the REVOICE function, described on
page 78.
• The R1 voice cannot
be turned off.

VOICE

DUAL VOICE
DUAL

The R2 TRACK button below the display can also be used to turn the R2 voice on
or off, only when a frame appears around the voice icons, or in the Song mode
including the Demo song playback.

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

MINUS ONE

VOICE

R1
DUAL

• The DUAL VOICE
mode can be used at
the same time as the
SPLIT VOICE mode,
described below. In
this case the L voice
is played on the lefthand section of the
keyboard while both
the R1 and R2 voices
are played on the
right-hand section of
the keyboard. See the
“The Split Voice
Mode” section, below,
for more information.

TRACK

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Playing the PSR-530

The Split Voice Mode
The SPLIT VOICE mode lets you play different voices with the left and right hands.
You could, for example, play bass with the left hand (the L voice) while playing piano
with the right (the R1 or R1 and R2 voices). The “split point” is initially set at B2 (note
number 59), but it can be set at any key on the keyboard.

• The split point can be
changed as required
as described below.

Split Point (59)

The SPLIT VOICE mode is engaged by pressing the [SPLIT VOICE] button.
When turned on, the L icon in the display will light in addition to the R1 or R1 and R2
icons. Press the [SPLIT VOICE] button a second time to disengage the SPLIT
VOICE mode: the L icon will go out leaving only the R voice.
VOICE

VOICE

SPLIT VOICE
SPLIT

The L TRACK button below the display can also be used to turn the L voice on or
off, only when a frame appears around the voice icons, or in the Song mode including
the Demo song playback.

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

MINUS ONE

SPLIT

TRACK

VOICE

• The L/R1/R2 voice
settings can be
changed as required
by using the REVOICE function, described on page 78.

VOICE

• The SPLIT VOICE
mode can be used at
the same time as the
DUAL VOICE mode,
described above. In
this case the L voice
is played on the lefthand section of the
keyboard while both
the R1 and R2 voices
are played on the
right-hand section of
the keyboard. See the
“The Dual Voice
Mode” section, above,
for more information.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Playing the PSR-530

Changing the SPLIT VOICE Split Point

The SPLIT VOICE split point can be set to any key on the PSR-530 keyboard to
match your individual playing requirements.

1 Select the SPLIT VOICE Split Point Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular
indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.
MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT
OVERALL

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “S.Split” function from
within the OVERALL menu . The MIDI note number corresponding to the current
split point will appear to the left of “S.Split” on the top line of the display.

059 S.Split

2 Set As Required
Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point. The key number of the
key you press will appear to the left of “S.Split” on the top line of the display. You can
also use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to enter the split point
key number. The lowest key on the keyboard (C1) is key number “36”, middle C (C3)
is “60”, and the highest key (C5) is 96. The split point can be set at any key number
from 0 through 127, allowing the split point to be set outside the range of the PSR-530
keyboard for MIDI applications.

• The split point key becomes the highest
key in the left-hand
section of the keyboard.
• The default split point
(59) can be instantly
recalled by pressing
the [–] and [+] buttons
at the same time.
• For the relationship
between the SPLIT
VOICE split point and
the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split
point, see page 30.
• When setting the split
point, that is, the sub
menu “S.Split” is
shown on the display,
pressing the key on
the keyboard doesn’t
either produce notes
or detect chords in the
accompaniment section, but only designates the split point.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Auto Accompaniment
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-530 has 100 different accompaniment “styles” that can be used to provide fullyorchestrated or rhythm-only accompaniment. The PSR-530’s sophisticated AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT system can provide automated bass and chord backing that is perfectly matched
to the selected accompaniment style.
When Auto-Accompaniment is turned on, the specified left-hand section of the keyboard
becomes the “auto accompaniment” section, and chords played in this section are automatically detected and used as a basis for fully automatic accompaniment with the selected style.

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
split point (54)

“auto accompaniment”
section

Using Auto Accompaniment

1 Select the Style Menu
Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE menu (the triangular indicator will
appear next to “STYLE” to the right of the display). The number and name of the
currently selected style will appear on the top line of the display, and the accompaniment track and volume icons in the display will appear framed.

001 8BtPop1
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

BASS

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

VOICE

MULTI PAD

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

VOICE R1

CHORD
1

STYLE
FINGERING
CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

SONG
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

R1
DUAL

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

2 Select a Style

The PSR-530 has 100 styles that can be selected by using the [–] and [+] buttons,
the number buttons, the data dial, or the [STYLE] button (these controls function in
the same way as for voice selection — see page 17). The styles are listed in the STYLE
list printed at the top of the instrument’s control panel.
1

• See page 77 for details on selecting cartridge styles.

STYLE

3 Turn AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT On
Press the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT [ON/OFF] so that its indicator lights.
• If AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is off, only
rhythm (drums and
percussion) accompaniment will be produced.

ON/
OFF

AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT

4 Set the Tempo
When you select a different style while the accompaniment is not playing, the
“default” tempo for that style is also selected, and the tempo is displayed immediately
above “TEMPO” in the display in quarter-note beats per minute. If the accompaniment is playing, the same tempo is maintained even if you select a different style.
You can change the tempo to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute,
however, by using the TEMPO [▼] and [▲] buttons. Press either button briefly to
decrement or increment the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continuous
decrementing or incrementing.

TEMPO

120 Tempo
VOICE L

VOICE R2

120
TEMPO

VOICE R1

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

HARMONY

101

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

When either of the TEMPO buttons is pressed the current tempo value will appear
on the top line of the display for a few seconds — during this time the [–] and [+]
buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the tempo. The default
tempo for the selected style can be recalled at any time by pressing both the TEMPO
[▼] and [▲] buttons simultaneously (or by pressing the [–] and [+] buttons simultaneously while the tempo value is showing on the top line of the display).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

5 Start the Accompaniment

There are several ways to start the accompaniment:
● Straight start
Press the [START/STOP] button. The rhythm will begin playing immediately
without bass and chord accompaniment. The currently selected MAIN [A] or
[B] section will play.
START/STOP
/

SYNC

STOP START

INTRO

MAIN/AUTO FILL

ENDING

• It is possible to select the
MAIN A or B section prior to
a straight start — refer to
“7. Select the MAIN A and
B Sections as Required,”
below.

● Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN A section
Press the [INTRO] button so that its indicator lights, press the MAIN/AUTO
FILL [A] button (not necessary if its indicator is already flashing), then press
[START/STOP].
SYNC

SYNC

STOP START

INTRO

MAIN/AUTO FILL

ENDING

START/STOP
/

● Start with an introduction followed by the MAIN B section
Press the [INTRO] button so that its indicator lights, press the MAIN/AUTO
FILL [B] button (not necessary if its indicator is already flashing), then press
[START/STOP].
SYNC

SYNC

STOP START

INTRO

MAIN/AUTO FILL

ENDING

START/STOP
/

● Synchronized start
Any of the above start types can be synchronized to the first note or chord
played on the left-hand section of the keyboard (i.e. keys to the left of and
including the split-point key — normally 54) by first pressing the [SYNC
START] button.
SYNC

SYNC

STOP START

INTRO

MAIN/AUTO FILL

ENDING

• If you press the [SYNC
START] button while the
accompaniment is playing,
the accompaniment will
stop and the synchro start
mode will be engaged.
• The [INTRO] button can be
used to select the INTRO
section even while the accompaniment is playing.
• The accompaniment split
point can be changed via
the “Accompaniment Split
Point” function in the
OVERALL menu — see
page 29.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Pressing the [SYNC START] button alone causes a straight start to occur
when the first note or chord is played. Press the [SYNC START] button and
then the appropriate [INTRO] and [MAIN/AUTO FILL] buttons for a
synchronized introduction start. The BEAT indicator will flash at the current
tempo when a synchronized start mode has been selected. The synchro start
mode can be disengaged prior to actually starting the accompaniment by
pressing the [SYNC START] button a second time.
SYNC

SYNC

STOP START

INTRO

MAIN/AUTO FILL

ENDING

• When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and
SPLIT VOICE split point are
set at different keys, the L
voice can be played between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and
SPLIT VOICE split point
when the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT function is on.
• When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point and
SPLIT VOICE split point are
set to the same key, the L
voice can be played anywhere to the left of the
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
split point and SPLIT
VOICE split point while
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
is not playing.

6 Play On the Auto-accompaniment Section Of the Keyboard
As soon as you play any chord that the PSR-530 can “recognize” on the lefthand section of the keyboard, the PSR-530 will automatically begin to play the
chord along with the selected rhythm and an appropriate bass line. The name of
the current chord will appear on the display. The accompaniment will continue
playing even if you release the keys (unless the Synchro Stop function is engaged
— page 26).
RATION

FINGERING

• The PSR-530 has several
fingering modes which allow you to play chords in
different ways. See “The
Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes” on page 30
for details.

MULTI PAD

mM 7

● The Beat Indicator
The four dots of the BEAT indicator provide a visual indication of the selected
tempo as shown below.
4/4 time

3/4 time

1st beat
2nd beat
3rd beat
4th beat

7 Select the MAIN A and B Sections as Required
The MAIN A and MAIN B sections can be selected at any time during playback
by pressing the corresponding button. Whenever you press the MAIN/AUTO
FILL [A] or [B] button during playback, the PSR-530 will generate an appropriate
“fill-in” (one of four types: AA, AB, BA, and BB) which will smoothly connect
the current section to the selected section — even if it is the same section. For
example, if you press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button while the MAIN A
section is playing, a fill-in will be produced, then the MAIN A section will
continue playing. When you select a different section, the fill-in will begin
immediately and the new section will actually begin playing from the top of the
next measure unless the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] or [B] button is pressed during

• The MAIN A section is automatically selected whenever the PSR-530 power is
initially turned on.
• The indicator of the destination section (MAIN A or B)
will flash while the corresponding fill-in is playing.
During this time you can
change the destination section by pressing the appropriate MAIN/AUTO FILL [A]
or [B] button.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

the last half beat of the measure, in which case the fill-in will begin from the
first beat of the next measure.
SYNC

SYNC

STOP START

INTRO

MAIN/AUTO FILL

ENDING

8 Stop the Accompaniment
The accompaniment can be stopped at any time by pressing the [START/
STOP] button. Press the [ENDING] button if you want to go to the ending
section and then stop.

START/STOP
/

SYNC

STOP START

INTRO

MAIN/AUTO FILL

ENDING

• The ending will begin playing immediately when you press the
[ENDING] button while the accompaniment is playing the first beat
of the measure.
The ending will begin playing from
the next measure when you press
the button while the accompaniment is playing the second or
larger numbered beat.
• If you press the [INTRO] button
while the ending is playing, the
intro section will begin playing after the ending is finished.
• Some INTRO and ENDING sections have their own chord progressions which play in the current
accompaniment key.
• If the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] or [B]
button is pressed while the ENDING section is playing, an appropriate fill-in will be played, followed
by a return to the MAIN A or B
section.
• The accompaniment volume can
be adjusted independently of the
keyboard volume via the ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME [▼ ]
and [▲ ] buttons (page 28).
• Pressing the [ENDING] button during the Ending playback decelerate its tempo (ritardando).

◆ The Synchro Stop Function
When the Synchro Stop function is engaged, accompaniment playback
will stop completely when all keys in the auto-accompaniment section of the
keyboard are released. Accompaniment playback will start again as soon as
a chord is played. The BEAT indicators in the display will flash while the
accompaneiment is stopped.
The Synchro Stop function is engaged by pressing the [SYNC STOP]
button so that the SYNC STOP icon in the display appears. Press the [SYNC
STOP] button again so that the icon disappears to turn the Synchro Stop
function off.
SYNC

STOP

REPEAT
MEASURE

EGISTRATION

SYNC
STOP

FINGERING

MULTI PAD

• The Synchro Stop function
can not be turned on when
the FULL KEYBOARD AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT fingering
mode is selected. The Synchro Stop function will be automatically turned off if the
FULL KEYBOARD fingering
mode is selected while the
Synchro Stop function is on.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Using Virtual Arranger
Simply pressing chords causes the Auto Accompaniment automatically plays the
slightly different chord variations and becomes livelier and more melodic when you
turn on the Virtual Arranger function while the Auto Accompaniment is active.

1 Select the Style Menu
Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE menu (the triangular indicator will
appear next to “STYLE” to the right of the display).
STYLE

• Simultaneously pressing the [SYNC STOP]
and [SYNC START]
buttons causes the
Virtual Arranger to
switch between off
and on. The current
on/off status will be
shown at the top left
of the display. (The
on/off display will return to its original condition after a few seconds.)

2 Select the Virtual Arranger Function
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “VirtArng” function. The
current on/off status will be shown at the top left of the display.

on VirtArng

Then use the [–] and [+] buttons or the Dial to select “on” or “off.”

Accompaniment Track Muting
The PSR-530 has eight accompaniment tracks — RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2,
BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, and PHRASE 2 — that you can
control to modify the “orchestration” and therefore the overall sound of the accompaniment. When a style is selected the icons corresponding to the tracks which contain
data for any section of that style will light.

• Individual track voices, volume, and other
parameters can be
changed by using the
REVOICE function —
page 80.

● What’s in the Tracks
RHYTHM 1 & 2

These are the main rhythm tracks. The RHYTHM tracks produce the
drum and percussion sounds.

BASS

The BASS track always plays a bass line, but the voice will change to
fit the selected style … acoustic bass, synth bass, tuba, etc.

CHORD 1 & 2

These tracks provide the rhythmic chordal accompaniment required by
each style. You’ll find guitar, piano, and other chordal instruments here.

PAD

This track plays long chords where necessary, using sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir.

PHRASE 1 & 2

This is where the musical embellishments reside. The PHRASE tracks
are used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras
that make the accompaniment more interesting.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

■ Muting Individual Tracks

Individual accompaniment tracks can be turned OFF (muted) or ON by using the
TRACK buttons corresponding to the target tracks. The track icon will disappear
when a track is muted.
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

PAD

PHRASE
1

VOICE

PHRASE
2

VOICE

R1
DUAL

TRACK

Accompaniment Volume Control
When the STYLE menu is selected (i.e. the accompaniment track and volume icons
are framed) the volume of the accompaniment in relation to the keyboard can be
adjusted for the best overall balance by using the ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG
VOLUME [▼] and [▲] buttons. When either button is pressed the current accompaniment volume setting will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds. The
accompaniment volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “127” (maximum volume).
The default setting is “100”. Press the ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME [▼]
button to decrease the volume or the [▲] button to increase the volume. Pressing
briefly to single step, or hold for continuous decrementing/incrementing.

100 AccVol
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

REVERB TRANSPOSE

ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

BASS

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

VOICE R1

REPEAT

CHORD
1

FINGERING
CHORD
2

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

PAD

VOICE

PHRASE
1

VOICE

PHRASE
2

VOICE

R1
DUAL

While the accompaniment volume setting appears on the top line of the display the
[–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the
accompaniment volume.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Changing the Accompaniment Split Point
The AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point can be set to any key on the PSR-530
keyboard to match your individual playing requirements.

1 Select the Accompaniment Split Point Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular
indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.
MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT
OVERALL

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “AccSpPnt” function
from within the OVERALL menu . The MIDI note number corresponding to the
current split point will appear to the left of “AccSpPnt” on the top line of the display.

054 AccSpPnt

2 Set As Required
Simply press the key you want to assign as the split point. The key number of the
key you press will appear to the left of “AccSpPnt” on the top line of the display. You
can also use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to enter the split point
key number. The lowest key on the keyboard (C1) is key number “36”, middle C (C3)
is “60”, and the highest key (C5) is 96. The split point can be set at any key number
from 0 through 127, allowing the split point to be set outside the range of the PSR-530
keyboard for MIDI applications.
1

• The split point key becomes the highest
key in the Auto Accompaniment section
of the keyboard.
• The default split point
(54) can be instantly
recalled by pressing
the [–] and [+] buttons
at the same time.
• When setting the split
point, that is, the sub
menu “AccSpPnt” is
shown on the display,
pressing the key on
the keyboard doesn’t
either produce notes
or detect chords in the
accompaniment section, but only designates the split point.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

◆ Interaction Between the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT and
SPLIT VOICE Split Points
The SPLIT VOICE split point (page 21) and AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point
can be independently specified, with the following limitations. The SPLIT VOICE
split point cannot be set at a lower key than the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point
(if you attempt to do this the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point will be set to the
same key as the SPLIT VOICE split point). Conversely, the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point cannot be set at a higher key than the SPLIT VOICE split point (if
you attempt to do this the SPLIT VOICE split point will be set to the same key as the
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point).
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
split point

Accompaniment

SPLIT VOICE
split point

R Voice

L Voice

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split point/
SPLIT VOICE split point

R Voice

Accompaniment/
L Voice

The Auto Accompaniment Fingering Modes
The PSR-530 AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature has five different fingering
modes which can be selected as follows.

1 Select the Fingering Mode Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to the left of the display to move the triangular
indicator next to “OVERALL” on the left side of the display.
MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT
OVERALL

• You can jump directly
to the “FngrngMd”
function by pressing
and holding the AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT
[ON/OFF] button for a
few seconds.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “FngrngMd” function
from within the OVERALL menu. The abbreviated name of the current fingering
mode will appear to the left of “FngrngMd” on the top line of the display.

SF FngrngMd

2 Select the Required Fingering Mode
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial to select the desired fingering mode:
SF

Single Finger

Fingered 1

Fingered 2

FuL

Full Keyboard

MuL

Multi-finger

● SF: The SINGLE FINGER Mode

SF FngrngMd
Single-finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce beautifully orchestrated
accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys on the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the
keyboard. The abbreviated chord fingerings described below are used:
C

■ For a major chord, press the root key only.
Cm

Cm 7

■ For a minor chord, simultaneously press the root key and a
black key to its left.
■ For a seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key and a
white key to its left.
■ For a minor-seventh chord, simultaneously press the root key
and both a white and black key to its left.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

● F1: The FINGERED 1 Mode

F1 FngrngMd
The Fingered 1 mode lets you finger your own chords on the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT section of the keyboard (i.e. all keys to the left of and including the splitpoint key — normally 54) while the PSR-530 supplies appropriately orchestrated
rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment in the selected style.
The FINGERED 1 mode recognizes the following chords:

Chord Name/[Abbreviation]

Normal Voicing

Chord (C)

Display

Major [M]

1-3-5

Add ninth [(9)]

1-2-3-5

C(9)

Sixth [6]

1 - (3) - 5 - 6

Sixth ninth [6(9)]

1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 6

C6(9)

Major seventh [M7]

1 - 3 - (5) - 7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - 7

CM7

Major seventh ninth [M7(9)]

1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - 7

CM7(9)

Major seventh add sharp eleventh [M7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - 7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - 7

CM7(#11)

Flatted fifth [(b5)]

1 - 3 - b5

C(b5)

Major seventh flatted fifth [M7b5]

1 - 3 - b5 - 7

CM7b5

Suspended fourth [sus4]

1-4-5

Csus4

Augmented [aug]

1 - 3 - #5

Caug

Major seventh augmented [M7aug]

1 - (3) - #5 - 7

CM7aug

Minor [m]

1 - b3 - 5

Minor add ninth [m(9)]

1 - 2 - b3 - 5

Cm(9)

Minor sixth [m6]

1 - b3 - 5 - 6

Cm6

Minor seventh [m7]

1 - b3 - (5) - b7

Cm7

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)]

1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - b7

Cm7(9)

Minor seventh add eleventh [m7(11)]

1 - (2) - b3 - 4 - 5 - (b7)

Cm7(11)

Minor major seventh [mM7]

1 - b3 - (5) - 7

CmM7

Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)]

1 - 2 - b3 - (5) - 7

CmM7(9)

Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7b5]

1 - b3 - b5 - b7

Cm7b5

Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7b5]

1 - b3 - b5 - 7

CmM7b5

Diminished [dim]

1 - b3 - b5

Cdim

Diminished seventh [dim7]

1 - b3 - b5 - 6

Cdim7

Seventh [7]

1 - 3 - (5) - b7 or
1 - (3) - 5 - b7

Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)]

1 - b2 - 3 - (5) - b7

C7(b9)

Seventh add flatted thirteenth [7(b13)]

1 - 3 - 5 - b6 - b7

C7(b13)

Seventh ninth [7(9)]

1 - 2 - 3 - (5) - b7

C7(9)

Seventh add sharp eleventh [7(#11)]

1 - (2) - 3 - #4 - 5 - b7 or
1 - 2 - 3 - #4 - (5) - b7

C7(#11)

Seventh add thirteenth [7(13)]

1 - 3 - (5) - 6 - b7

C7(13)

Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)]

1 - #2 - 3 - (5) - b7

C7(#9)

Seventh flatted fifth [7b5]

1 - 3 - b5 - b7

C7b5

Seventh augmented [7aug]

1 - 3 - #5 - b7

C7aug

Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4]

1 - 4 - (5) - b7

C7sus4

One plus two plus five [1+2+5]

1-2-5

C1+2+5

• Notes in parentheses
can be omitted.
• If you play any three
adjacent keys (including black keys), the
chord sound will be
cancelled and only
the rhythm instruments will continue
playing (CHORD
CANCEL function).
• Playing a single key
or two same root keys
in the adjacent octaves produces accompaniment based
only on the root.
• A perfect fifth (1 + 5)
produces accompaniment based only on
the root and fifth
which can be used
with both major and
minor chords.
• The chord fingerings
listed are all in “root”
position, but other inversions can be used
— with the following
exceptions:
m7, m7b 5, 6, m6,
sus4, aug, dim7,
7 b5, 6(9), m7(11),
1+2+5.
• Inversion of the 7sus4
chord are not recognized if the 5th is
omitted.
• The AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT will sometimes not change
when related chords
are played in sequence (e.g. some
minor chords followed
by the minor seventh).
• Two-note fingerings
will produce a chord
based on the previously played chord.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

Example for “C” chords

CmM 7

CmM 7 (9)

(

)
(

(

C (b5)

CM7 b5

Cm 7 (9)

Cm 7 (11)

)

CM 7 aug

CM7 (#11)

(

Caug

)

Csus 4

CM 7 (9)

CM 7

)

C (9)

(

C 6 (9)

Cm (9)

Cm 6

Cm 7

Cm 7 b5

CmM 7 b5

Cdim

Cdim 7

C 7 (13)

C 7 (#9)

C 7 b5

C 7 aug

C 7 sus4

(

)
(

)
(
)

C 7 (b13)

(

)

C 7 (b9)

C 1+2+5

)

(

)
(

(

)
(

C 7 (#11)

)

C 7 (9)

(

)

(

)

(

)

● F2: The FINGERED 2 Mode

F2 FngrngMd
This is essentially the same as the FINGERED 1 mode, described above, except
that the FINGERED 2 mode additionally allows you to specify the lowest note of
each chord — simply, the lowest note played in the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
section of the keyboard is used as the accompaniment bass note. This means you
can specify “on-bass” chords in which the main bass note for the chord is not the
root of the chord. For a C major chord, for example, you could use E (the third) or
G (the fifth) as the bass note rather than C.
C

C on E

C on G

● FuL: The FULL KEYBOARD Mode

FuL FngrngMd
When the FULL KEYBOARD mode is selected, the PSR-530 will automatically
create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything using both
hands, anywhere on the keyboard. You do not have to worry about specifying the
accompaniment chords. The name of the detected chord will appear in the display.

• When the FULL KEYBOARD mode is selected, the split point
setting (see page 29)
for the auto accompaniment will be ignored.
• Chord detection occurs at approximately
8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords
— less than an 8th
note in length — may
not be detected.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

● MuL: The MULTI-FINGER Mode

muL FngrngMd
This is the default accompaniment mode. The MULTI-FINGER mode automatically detects SINGLE FINGER or FINGERED 1 chord fingerings, so you can
use either type of fingering without having to switch fingering modes.

• If you want to play minor, seventh or minor
seventh chords using
the SINGLE FINGER
operation in the MULTIFINGER Mode, always
press the closest white/
black key(s) to the root
of the chord.

◆ The Stop Accompaniment Function
While the SINGLE FINGER, FINGERED 1, FINGERED 2, or MULTI-FINGER mode is selected chords played in the AUTO ACCOMPNIMENT section of
the keyboard are also detected and played by the PSR-530 Auto Accompaniment
system when the accompaniment is stopped (except when the FULL KEYBOARD
mode is engaged). In this case the bass note and chord voices are selected
automatically.

• When the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT split
point and SPLIT
VOICE split point are
set to the same key,
the L voice and the
automatically selected
bass note will sound.

One Touch Setting
The PSR-530’s 100 internal styles each have four recommended “panel setups”
that can be instantly selected via the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] and REGISTRATION MEMORY [1] … [4] buttons. The One Touch Setting feature automatically
sets the following parameters:
● One Touch Setting Parameter List
• R1 Voice
(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb level,
chorus send level, DSP send level)

• Main A/B section

• Dual Voice ON/OFF

• Synchro start=ON

• R2 Voice
(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb level,
chorus send level, DSP send level)

• Accompaniment volume=100

• Split Voice ON/OFF

• Reverb ON/OFF

• L Voice
(Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb level,
chorus send level, DSP send level)

• Chorus ON/OFF

• Split Point : Split Voice=59
: Auto Accompaniment=54
• Auto Accompaniment=ON

• Accompaniment Track data
(Style parameters=default, Track ON/OFF)

• Harmony ON/OFF, type, volume

• DSP ON/OFF, type, variation ON/OFF
• Multi Pad Set number
• Chord Match ON/OFF=Default (Multi Pad1…4)

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Auto Accompaniment

1 Select a Style

Select the STYLE menu and select an accompaniment style as described on page
22.

2 Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] Button
Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button. The ONE TOUCH SETTING and
REGIST [1] icons will appear in the display, and the ONE TOUCH SETTING type 1
panel settings will be recalled. At the same, AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT will
automatically be turned on if it was off, and the SYNC START mode will be engaged.
ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

3 Select a ONE TOUCH SETTING Type, as Required
If you want to select a different REGISTRATION MEMORY, use the REGISTRATION MEMORY buttons to select the desired ONE TOUCH SETTING type. The
corresponding number will appear in the display, and all setting will change according
to the recalled data.
REGISTRATION MEMORY

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

REPEAT

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

4 Turn ONE TOUCH SETTING Off When Done
Press the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button so that the ONE TOUCH SETTING
icon in the display disappears to turn the ONE TOUCH SETTING feature off.

• “No OTS” will appear
on the display if an
optional cartridge
style which has no
ONE TOUCH SETTING data is selected.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Digital Effects
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
With the digital effects built into the PSR-530 you can add ambiance and depth to your music
in a variety of ways—such as adding reverb that makes you sound like you are playing in a
concert hall or adding harmony notes for a full, rich sound.
Digital Effects
REVERB Button
REVERB

CHORUS Button
CHORUS

DSP Button
DSP

HARMONY Button
HARMONY

You can create a reverb effect that makes you sound like you
are playing in places like a concert hall, or live in a club.

You can add a chorus effect that makes your playing sound
as though multiple parts were being played together at the
same time.
In addition to the reverb and chorus types, the effects usually
used to a specific part, such as the distortion and tremolo,
can be selected.

You can add a variety of harmony notes to the R1 voice, or
to your playing in the right-hand section, as well as adding
an tremolo or other effect.

• For details about using Digital Effects (Reverb, Chorus, DSP) see page 106.

Reverb
The PSR-530 has 12 digital reverb effects that simulate the natural reverberation of
a range of acoustic environments. See “The Digital Effect List” on page 108. There’s
also an “Off” setting:

Turning the Reverb Effect On or Off
Press the [REVERB] button so that the REVERB icon appears in the display to turn
the selected REVERB effect on. Press [REVERB] a second time so that the REVERB
icon disappears to turn the REVERB effect off.
REVERB

0
REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
HARMONY

TEMPO

The REVERB effect applies only to the R1. Reverb can be turned completely off
by selecting the “off” reverb type as described below.

• The REVERB effect
will be turned on or off
according to the selected R1 panel voice.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

Selecting a Reverb Type

1 Select the Digital Effect “Reverb” Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the
display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.
MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT

• You can also jump directly to
the DIGITAL EFFECT REVERB TYPE function by
pressing and holding the
[REVERB] button for a few
seconds.

OVERALL

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Reverb”. After a few
seconds the name of the currently selected REVERB type will appear on top line
of the display.

Reverb
01 Hall 1

2 Select a Reverb Effect
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to select the desired
REVERB effect (the name of the selected REVERB effect will appear on the top
line of the display). Select “OFF” if you want no REVERB effect on any part of
the PSR-530 sound.

0
NO

YES

• When you select a different
Style, the appropriate Reverb type will be selected
accordingly. Some of the
Styles contain Reverb types
which cannot be selected on
the PSR-530. In this case “ –
:XG Rev.” will be displayed
when you select the SUB
MENU Reverb of the DIGITAL EFFECT.
• If you don’t want to apply the
Reverb effect to Styles or
Songs, select “13: OFF”
from the Reverb types, or
set the Reverb Return Level
to its minimum. In this case
no Reverb is applied to the
entire system. If you use the
Revoice function, you can
set the Reverb Send Level
for each track of the Style/
User Song independently
(see page 78).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

Reverb Return Level

The RevRtnLv (Reverb Return Level) parameter sets the amount of reverb effect
returned from the reverb effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the degree of
reverb effect applied to the overall sound.

1 Select the Digital Effect “RevRtnLv” Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select
“RevRtnLvl”.

064 RevRtnLv

2 Set the Reverb Return Level
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to set the desired reverb
return level (the current return level value appears to the left of “RevRtnLv” on the
display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the greater the return
level.

Chorus
The PSR-530’s 9 chorus effects can be used to give your sound extra life and
animation. See “The Digital Effect List” on page 108.

Turning the Chorus Effect On or Off
Press the [CHORUS] button so that the CHORUS icon appears in the display to turn
the selected chorus effect on. Press [CHORUS] a second time so that the CHORUS
icon disappears to turn the CHORUS effect off.
CHORUS

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

DSP

The CHORUS effect applies only to the R1. Chorus can be turned completely off
by selecting the “Off” chorus type as described below.

• The CHORUS effect
will be turned on or off
according to the selected R1 panel voice.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

Selecting a Chorus Effect

1 Select the Digital Effect “Chorus” Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the
display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.
MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT

• You can also jump directly to
the DIGITAL EFFECT Chorus function by pressing and
holding the [CHORUS] button for a few seconds.

OVERALL

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Chorus”. After a few
seconds the name of the currently selected chorus effect will appear on the top
line of the display.

Chorus
06 Flanger1

2 Select a Chorus Effect
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to select the desired
chorus effect (the name of the selected chorus effect will appear on the top line
of the display). Select “Off” if you want no chorus effect on any part of the PSR530 sound.

• When you select a different
Style, the appropriate Chorus type will be selected accordingly. Some of the
Styles contain Chorus types
which cannot be selected on
the PSR-530. In this case “ –
:XG Cho.” will be displayed
when you select the SUB
MENU Chorus of the DIGITAL EFFECT.
• If you don’t want to apply the
Chorus effect to Styles or
Songs, select “10: OFF”
from the Chorus types, or
set the Chorus Return Level
to its minimum. In this case
no Chorus is applied to the
entire system. If you use the
Revoice function, you can
set the Chorus Send Level
for each track of the Style/
User Song independently
(see page 78).

Chorus Return Level
The ChoRtnLv (Chorus Return Level) parameter sets the amount of chorus
effect returned from the chorus effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the
degree of chorus effect applied to the overall sound.

1 Select the Digital Effect “ChoRtnLv” Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the
display next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼]
buttons to select “ChoRtnLvl”.

064 ChoRtnLv

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

2 Set the Chorus Return Level

Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to set the desired chorus
return level (the current return level value appears to the left of “ChoRtnLv” on the
display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the greater the return
level.

DSP
The PSR-530 features an extensive range of 45 DSP (Digital Signal Processor)
effects. There are two types of digital effects, system effects and insertion effects. The
illustration below will give you an idea of how DSP effects work, centering on the
mixer. See “The Digital Effect List” on page 108.

Insertion Effect
System Effect

SEND

RETURN

Amp

Mixer
Speaker

● System Effect:
Applies to all of the parts input to the mixer. You can set the Effect Send Level and
Effect Return Level. The System Effect includes Reverb and Chorus types.
● Insertion Effect:
Applies only to a designated part before inputting the signal to the mixer. You can
effectively use the digital effects by applying the effect to the specific part. With
the Insertion Effect, you can only designate the Effect Send Level. The Insertion
Effect includes Distortion and Tremolo.

• DSP send level cannot be modified for
some Insertion effects. In this case the
display shows “- - -”,
indicating that it’s not
accessible.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

Turning the DSP Effect On or Off

Press the [DSP] button so that the DSP icon appears in the display to turn the
selected DSP effect on. Press [DSP] a second time so that the DSP icon disappears to
turn the DSP effect off.
DSP

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

• The DSP effect and
variation settings may
change according to
the selected R1 panel
voice.

DSP

The DSP effect applies to the R1, R2 and L. The DSP effect can be turned
completely off by selecting the “Off” DSP type as described below.

Selecting a DSP Effect

1 Select the Digital Effect “DSP” Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.
MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT

• You can also jump directly to the DIGITAL
EFFECT DSP function by pressing and
holding the [DSP] button for a few seconds.

OVERALL

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “DSP”. After a few seconds
the name of the currently selected DSP effect will appear on the top line of the display.

DSP
01 Hall 1

2 Select a DSP Effect
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to select the desired DSP
effect (the name of the selected DSP effect will appear on the top line of the display).
Select “Off” if you want no DSP effect on any part of the PSR-530 sound.
Each DSP effect has its own variation. Turn the [DSP VARIATION] button ON to
activate each variation.
116
HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

DSP

VARIATION

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

DSP Return Level

The DspRtnLv (DSP Return Level) parameter sets the amount of DSP effect
returned from the DSP effect stage, thus making it possible to adjust the degree of DSP
effect applied to the overall sound.

1 Select the Digital Effect “DspRtnLv” Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select
“DspRtnLv”.

064 DspRtnLv

2 Set the DSP Return Level
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to set the desired DSP
return level (the current return level value appears to the left of “DspRtnLv” on the
display). The range is from “0” to “127”. The higher the value the greater the return
level.

Harmony
When HARMONY is on, playing single notes or chords on the right-hand section
of the keyboard produces automatic harmony matched to the accompaniment chords
(AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT must be on). Harmony is applied to the R1 voice. When
chords are played the harmony is based on the last note played (i.e. last-note priority).
The PSR-530 has 16 different harmony types, as listed below.

No.

Type

Description

Duet

This harmony type produces a duophonic melody with the second voice below the melody
line.

Trio

This harmony type generates two voices in addition to the melody voice.

4 Part

Three harmony notes are generated to produce a four-note chord.

4 Part Jazz

Similar to the preceding type, but depending on the chords played this type will
sometimes produce a more colorful sound.

Country

Similar to Duet, but the second voice is above the melody line.

Octave

One note is added an octave below the melody.

Tremolo

The note(s) pressed and held is(are) repeatedly played at the preset tempo.

Tremolo Duet

Combination of Tremolo and Duet; produces a duophonic melody with two voices played
alternately.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

No.

Type

Description

Tremolo Octave

Combination of Tremolo and Octave; produces a duophonic melody with two voices
played alternately (the second voice is an octave below the melody).

Strumming

This type adds arpeggiated pattern to the melody.

Trio Delay

Two notes slightly below the melody are added to create three parts. Additional notes are
delayed slightly.

Vibraphone &
Jazz Guitar

Two voices, Vibraphone and Jazz Guitar, below the melody are added to create three parts.

Trumpet & Sax

Two voices, Trumpet and Saxophone, below the melody are added to create three parts.

Back Vocal

“Vocal” voice is added to the melody to get a vocal part in the background.

Strings

“Strings” voice is added to the melody to create an orchestral atmosphere.

Forest

“Twitterings” of a bird are added to the melody to create an effect as if you were playing
outside.

• The Harmonies except for the types 6,7 and 9
are applied to the R1 voice according to the
chords detected in the Accompaniment section.

Turning the Harmony Effect On or Off
Press the [HARMONY] button so that the HARMONY icon appears in the display
to turn the selected HARMONY effect on. Press [HARMONY] a second time so that
the HARMONY icon disappears to turn the HARMONY effect off.

HARMONY

0
REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
HARMONY

TEMPO

Selecting a Harmony Type

• HARMONY can not
be turned on when a
drum kit is selected
for the R1 voice.
• HARMONY can not
be turned on when
the FULL KEYBOARD
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT fingering mode
is selected even if
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT is on. HARMONY will be automatically turned off if
the FULL KEYBOARD
fingering mode is selected while the HARMONY effect is on.
• When the Voice Set
function is ON (Page
85), the HARMONY
effect settings may
change according to
the selected R1 panel
voice.

1 Select the Digital Effect “Harmony” Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”.
MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT
OVERALL

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Digital Effects

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Harmony”. After a few
seconds the name of the currently selected HARMONY type will appear on top line
of the display.

Harmony

• You can also jump directly to the DIGITAL
EFFECT HARMONY
TYPE function by
pressing and holding
the [HARMONY] button for a few seconds.

01 Duet

2 Select a Harmony Type
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to select the desired
HARMONY type (the name of the selected HARMONY type will appear on the top
line of the display).

Adjusting the Harmony Volume
The volume of the harmony sound in relation to the keyboard sound can be adjusted
for HARMONY types 1 through 10 as follows (HARMONY types 11 through 22 are
not affected):

1 Select the Digital Effect “HarmVol” Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular indicator in the display
next to “DIGITAL EFFECT”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select
“HarmVol”. The current harmony volume setting will appear to the left of “HarmVol”
on the display.

100 HarmVol

2 Adjust the Harmony Volume
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to adjust the harmony
volume as required. The range is from “0” to “127” — “0” is minimum (no sound) and
“127” is maximum volume.

• When the Voice Set
function is ON (page
85), the Harmony Volume may change according to the selected R1 panel voice.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
The Pitch Bend Wheel
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Use the PSR-530 pitch bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or down
(roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. The pitch bend wheel is self-centering
and will automatically return to nornal pitch when released.

Setting the Pitch Bend Range
The maximum pitch bend range can be set via the PITCH BEND RANGE function
in the OVERALL function group. Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the
triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”.
MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT
OVERALL

• When the Voice Set
function is ON (page
85), the Pitch Bend
Range will be
changed according to
the selected R1 panel
voice.
• The default pitch bend
range can be instantly
recalled by pressing
the [+] and [–] buttons
simultaneously.

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “PBRange”. The current
pitch bend range setting will appear to the left of the function name on the top line of
the display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to set the pitch
bend range from “01” to “12” as required. Each increment corresponds to one
semitone.

02 PBRange

A setting of “02”, for example, will result in a maximum pitch bend range of plus
and minus a whole note.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Transpose
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
This functions allow the overall pitch of the PSR-530 to be transposed up or down by a
maximum of one octave in semitone increments.

Setting Transposition
Use the TRANSPOSE [▼] and [▲] buttons to set the desired degree of transposition. Press either button briefly to decrement or increment by one, or hold for
continuous decrementing or incrementing. The current transpose value will appear on
the top line of the display for a few seconds whenever one of the TRANSPOSE buttons
is pressed — during this time the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial can
also be used to set the transpose value (the transpose value also appears continuously
above “TRANSPOSE” in the display).

TRANSPOSE

-02 Transpos
VOICE L

-2

VOICE R2

101

VOICE R1

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

The transpose range is from –12 to +12. Each step corresponds to one semitone,
allowing a maximum upward or downward transposition of 1-octave. A setting of “0”
produces the normal pitch.

• Press the TRANSPOSE [▼ ] and [▲]
buttons simultaneously to instantly
reset the transpose
value to “0”.
• The new TRANSPOSE value will take
effect from the next
key played.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Registration Memory
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-530 Registration Memory feature can be used to memorize 128 complete controlpanel setups (32 banks, 4 setups each) that you can recall whenever needed.

Registering the Panel Settings

1 Set Up the Controls as Required
Make the desired control settings. The following settings are memorized by the
Registration Memory function:
● Data Stored By the Registration Memory
VOICE PARAMETERS
• R1 Voice (Voice number,
volume, octave, pan, reverb
send level, chorus send level,
DSP send level)

ACCOMPANIMENT PARAMETERS
• Split Point (Split Voice)

• Auto Accompaniment ON/OFF

• Touch Sensitivity

• Style number

• Reverb ON/OFF

• Fingering mode

• Dual Voice ON/OFF

• Chorus ON/OFF

• Tempo

• R2 Voice (Voice number,
volume, octave, pan, reverb
send level, chorus send level,
DSP send level)

• DSP ON/OFF, variation ON/
OFF

• Split point
(Auto Accompaniment)

• DSP type

• Accompaniment volume

• Harmony ON/OFF, type,
volume

• Track data (Track ON/OFF, voice, volume,
pan, reverb send level, chorus send level)

• Pitch bend range

• Accompaniment section (Main A/B)

• Scale Tuning

• Multi Pad Set number

• Split Voice ON/OFF
• L Voice (Voice number,
volume, octave, pan, reverb
send level, chorus send level,
DSP send level)

• Chord Match ON/OFF (Multi Pad1…4)
• Transpose
• Reverb type
• Chorus type

2 Select a Registration Bank (if necessary)
Any of the eight Registration Memory banks can be selected via the REGISTRATION MEMORY menu. Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the triangular
indicator next to “REGISTRATION MEMORY “ in the menu list to the left of the
display — the currently selected registration bank number and name will appear on
the top line of the display. Then use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data
dial to select the desired bank (1 through 32).

01 Bank 1

• Press and hold the
REGISTRATION
MEMORY [MEMORY]
button for a few seconds to go directly to
the REGISTRATION
BANK display.

0
NO

YES

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Registration Memory

3 Register the Settings

While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the REGISTRATION
MEMORY buttons — [1] through [4]. Any data that was previously in the selected
location is erased and replaced by the new settings. The corresponding REGISTRATION MEMORY number will appear below “REGISTRATION” in the display.

• The REGISTRATION
MEMORY contents
will be retained even
after turning the
power off. See page
98 for the details.

REGISTRATION MEMORY

REPEAT

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

Recall the Registered Panel Settings
Simply select the appropriate bank as described above, then press the desired
REGISTRATION MEMORY button at any time to recall the memorized settings. The
corresponding Registration Memory number will appear below “REGISTRATION”
in the display, and the appropriate setting changes will appear in the display.

REGISTRATION MEMORY

REPEAT

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

• REGISTRATION
MEMORY data cannot be recalled when
the ONE TOUCH
SETTING feature is
on.
• No REGISTRATION
MEMORY indicator
will be showing when
the PSR-530 is initially turned on or
when a bank is selected prior to actually
selecting a REGISTRATION MEMORY
number.

The Accompaniment Freeze Function
When the FREEZE function is engaged, the accompaniment parameters listed
above will not be changed when a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled. This
allows you to recall different REGISTRATION MEMORY settings while using Auto
Accompaniment, without suddenly disturbing the flow of the accompaniment. The
FREEZE function is turned on and off by pressing the [FREEZE] button. The
“FREEZE” icon appears in the display when it is turned on.

GISTRATION MEMORY

FREEZE

REPEAT

FREEZE
REGISTRATION

MEASURE

MULTI PAD

• FREEZE remains on
even if a different registration bank is selected.
• The Freeze function
will automatically be
turned on when one
of the following
modes, Song, Record
or Style Revoice, is
engaged.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
The Multi Pads
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-530 MULTI PADS can be used to play a number of short pre-recorded rhythmic and
melodic sequences that can be used to add impact and variety to your keyboard performances. You can also record your own MULTI PAD phrases as described in “MULTI PAD
Recording” on page 71.
Some pad phrases simply play back as programmed, while others are “chord match” types
which, if the CHORD MATCH function is turned on, are automatically transposed to match
chords played using the PSR-530 Auto Accompaniment feature.

Selecting a MULTI PAD Set
The PSR-530 has 36 multi pad sets, each containing a complete set of 4 MULTI
PAD phrases — 144 phrases in all. Before using the MULTI PADS, select the MULTI
PAD set containing the phrases you want to use as follows:

1 Select the Multi Pad Function
To select a multi pad set first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the
MULTI PAD function so that the triangular indicator in the display appears next to
“MULTI PAD” to the left of the display.
MULTI PAD

MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT
OVERALL

2 Select a Multi Pad Set Number
If necessary use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons so that the name of the
currently selected MULTI PAD set appears on the display (see list on page 50), then
use the [–] and [+], number buttons, or data dial to select the MULTI PAD set you want
to use.

01 Fanfare1

• Press and hold the
MULTI PAD [STOP]
button for a few seconds to go directly to
the MULTI PAD SET
display.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The Multi Pads

Playing the MULTI PADs
Simply tap any of the MULTI PADs at any time to play back the corresponding
phrase at the currently set tempo. MULTI PAD playback begins as soon as the button
is pressed. You can even play two, three, or four MULTI PADs at the same time. Also,
you can create “retriggered sample” effects by repeatedly pressing a pad before its
contents are completely played back.

MUTLI PAD

STOP

MEASURE

MULTI PAD

The MULTI PAD voices are indepedent from the voices you have currently selected
for keyboard performance. You could, for example, play piano on the keyboard while
a MULTI PAD plays a brass chord stab.
When the CHORD MATCH function (see page 51) for a pad is turned on, the
corresponding phrase will be automatically transposed to match chords played using
the PSR-530 Auto-accompaniment feature.
MULTI PAD playback can be terminated by pressing the MULTI PAD [STOP]
button.
MUTLI PAD

STOP

● The Multi Pad Sets
Chord Match
Set

Chord Match

Pad 1

Pad 2

Pad 3

Pad 4

1 Fanfare1

—

2 Fanfare2

—

3 Brassy1

4 Brassy2

5 Synth Brass

6 Guitar Play1

7 Guitar Play2

8 Guitar Play3
9 Guitar Play4

Set

Pad 1

Pad 2

Pad 3

Pad 4

19 Classic

20 Jingle

21 Horror SE

—

22 Racing SE

—

23 Stormy SE

—

24 Water SE

—

25 Dog SE

—

26 Haha SE

—

27 Rock Kit

—

10 Techno Synth1

28 Techno Kit

—

11 Techno Synth2

29 Analog Kit

—

12 Arpeggio

30 Tom Flam

—

13 Crystal

31 Latin Percusion1

—

14 Twinkle

32 Latin Percussion2

—

15 Magical

33 Timbales

—

16 Piano Sequence

34 Analog Sequence

—

17 Banjo Sequence

35 Conga Sequence

—

18 Gothic

36 Techno Sequence

—

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The Multi Pads

Turning the CHORD MATCH Function On/Off
The CHORD MATCH function can be individually turned on or off for each of the
MULTI PADs, as described below.

• The chord match
function has no effect
with pads that contain
percussion phrases.

1 Select the MULTI PAD Function
Use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the MULTI PAD function so that the
triangular indicator in the display appears next to “MULTI PAD” to the left of the
display.
MULTI PAD

MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT
OVERALL

2 Select a CHORD MATCH Function
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select “Pad1Chd”, “Pad2Chd”,
“Pad3Chd”, or “Pad4Chd”, depending on the pad for which you want to turn the
CHORD MATCH function on or off.

• The chord match on/
off status depends on
the selected Multi
Pad.

on Pad1Chd

3 Turn the CHORD MATCH Function On or Off
Use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial to turn the CHORD MATCH function for
the selected pad “on” or “off” as required.
1

0
NO

YES

• The CHORD MATCH
ON/OFF setting is restored to its original
status whenever a
preset MULTI PAD
set is selected.
• When the CHORD
MATCH ON/OFF status of a user MULTI
PAD (see page 71)
set is changed, the
new status is recorded with the
MULTI PAD data.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Song Playback
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Use the following procedure to play back the PSR-530’s internal demonstration songs as well
as songs you record yourself (see “Song Recording”, page 58).

Song Playback Procedure

1 Select the Song Menu
Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG menu (the triangular indicator will
appear next to “SONG” to the right of the display). The number and name of the
currently selected song will appear on the top line of the display, and the song track
and volume icons near the bottom of the display will appear framed.

01 PeterGun
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

VOICE

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

BASS

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

VOICE R1

CHORD
1

STYLE
FINGERING
CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

SONG
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

MINUS ONE

2 Select a SONG Number
If necessary, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to select
the SONG number you want to play. The SONG number can also be incremented by
pressing the [SONG] button: press briefly to increment by one, or hold for continuous
incrementing.

02 R&B

0
NO

YES

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

3 Start Playback

Playback will begin as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. You can turn
the MELODY and ACCOMPANIMENT tracks on and off during playback as required
by using the TRACK buttons.
START/STOP
/

• You can also start
playback from any
specified measure
(see page 54).

4 Play Along If You Like
Play along on the keyboard if you like. You can also change the tempo during
playback.

5 Stop Playback
SONG playback will stop automatically when the entire SONG has been played
back. You can also stop playback at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button.

Song Volume Control
When the SONG menu is selected (i.e. the song track and volume icons near the
bottom of the display are framed) the volume of SONG playback in relation to the
keyboard can be adjusted for the best overall balance by using the ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME [▼] and [▲] buttons. When either button is pressed the
current song volume setting will appear on the top line of the display for a few seconds.
The song volume range is from “0” (no sound) to “127” (maximum volume). The
default setting is “100”. Press the ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME [▼] button
to decrease the volume or the [▲] button to increase the volume. Pressing briefly to
single step, or hold for continuous decrementing/incrementing.
While the song volume setting appears on the top line of the display the [–] and [+]
buttons, number buttons, or data dial can also be used to set the song volume.

100 SongVol
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

ACCOMPANIMENT/SONG VOLUME

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

BASS

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

VOICE R1

CHORD
1

FINGERING
CHORD
2

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

PAD

VOICE

PHRASE
1

VOICE

PHRASE
2

VOICE

MINUS ONE

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

Play from a Specified Measure
You can start SONG playback from any specified measure, as long as the specified
measure is within the range of measures that has already been recorded:

1 Select the Measure Parameter
While the SONG menu is selected, but no playback or recording is in progress, use
the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “Measure” parameter in the display.
The current measure number will appear to the left of “Measure” on the top line of the
display (the current measure number is also continuously displayed next to “MEASURE” in the display).

001 Measure
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

VOICE R1

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

MEASURE

1
1

2 Enter the Desired Measure Number
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to enter the desired measure
number.

009 Measure
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

VOICE R1

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

MEASURE

1
9
0
NO

YES

3 Start Playback
You can now start playback from the specified measure number by pressing the
[START/STOP] button.
START/STOP
/

• You can move the
measure number for
playback back and
forth even during the
song playback.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

Minus-one Practice
Minus-one playback lets you turn off specific parts of a song so you can practice
them on the PSR-530 keyboard while the other parts play automatically. Any of the
PSR-530’s four MELODY tracks and/or the ACCOMPANIMENT track can be turned
on or off as required. Individual SONG tracks can be turned OFF (muted) or ON by
using the TRACK buttons corresponding to the target MELODY or ACCOMPANIMENT tracks. The track icon will disappear when a track is muted.

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

MINUS ONE

VOICE

SPLIT

VOICE

R1
DUAL

Minus-one Track Assignment
Many of the PSR-530 demonstration songs, and songs provided on Music Cartridges (see “Using Music Cartridges”, page 75) have more than 4 channels — as many
as 16, in fact. This function lets you assign any of the song’s channels to the PSR-530’s
MELODY tracks so they can be turned on or off for minus-one practice.

1 Select the MinusOne Parameter
While the SONG menu is selected, but no recording is in progress, use the SUB
MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “MinusOne” parameter in the display. After
a few seconds “MinusOne” will change to “MinusCh”, the number of the current
minus-one channel will appear to the left of “MinusCh”, and a frame will appear
around the MELODY 1 song track icon.

MinusOne
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

REVERB TRANSPOSE

HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

BASS

FINGERING
CHORD
2

CHORUS
PAD

VOICE

PHRASE
1

VOICE

PHRASE
2

VOICE

VOICE R2

101

TEMPO

BASS

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

VOICE R1

REPEAT

116
HARMONY

CHORD
1

REVERB TRANSPOSE

MULTI PAD

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

MINUS ONE

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

VOICE L

REPEAT

116

01 MinusCh

VOICE R1

CHORD
1

FINGERING
CHORD
2

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

PAD

VOICE

PHRASE
1

VOICE

PHRASE
2

VOICE

MINUS ONE

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

2 Select a MELODY Track

Use the TRACK buttons to select the song MELODY track (1…4) to which a
minus-one channel is to be assigned. A frame will appear around the selected track
icon.

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

MINUS ONE

3 Assign a Channel to the Selected Track
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttoms, or data dial to assign the desired
minus-one channel (1…16) to the selected MELODY track. The number of the
assigned channel will appear to the left of “MinusCh” on the top line of the display.

05 MinusCh

0
NO

YES

• Press the [–] and [+]
buttons simultaneously to recall the
song’s initial channel
assignment for the selected track.
• Minus-one channel
assignments do not
apply to songs you
record yourself.
• If a selected song includes minus-one
channel settings,
those channels will
automatically be assigned to the appropriate tracks.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Playback

Repeat Play
This function allows you to specify any section of a song — internal or cartridge —
for continuous repeat playback.

1 Select the A-b Repeat Parameter
While the SONG menu is selected, but no recording is in progress, use the SUB
MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “A-b Repeat” parameter in the display. The
MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] and [B] button indicators will flash.

A-b Repeat

2 Start Playback
Press the [START/STOP] button to start song playback.
START/STOP
/

3 Specify the Repeat “A” and “B” Points
While the song is playing, press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button at the beginning
of the section to be repeated (the [A] button indicator will light continuously, and the
“A” repeat icon will appear in the display), then press the MAIN/AUTO FILL [B]
button at the end of the section to be repeated (the [B] button indicator will light
continuously, and the “B” repeat icon will appear in the display). Repeat playback will
begin automatically from the A point as soon as the B point has been specified, and
will continue until either the MAIN/AUTO FILL [A] button is pressed again to cancel
the repeat function, or until song playback is stopped.

MAIN/AUTO FILL

B
REPEAT

FREEZE

ONE TOUCH
SETTING
MEASURE

• If the MAIN/AUTO
FILL [B] button is
pressed during repeat
playback, the previously specified “B”
point will be cancelled
and a new “B” point
can be specified as
required.
• Repeat playback will
continue even if a different menu is selected during repeat
playback.

MAIN/AUTO FILL

• If only the “A” repeat
point is specified, repeat playback will occur between the “A”
point and the end of
the song.

B
REPEAT

FREEZE

ONE TOUCH
SETTING
MEASURE

• Repeat playback will
be cancelled if a different SONG number
selected or the record
mode is engaged or
the revoice mode is
engaged.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Song Recording
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-530 SONG tracks allows you to record and play back complete songs including
chord sequences created using the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature and a melody lines
you play on the keyboard. The SONG tracks include one ACCOMPANIMENT track and four
MELODY tracks.
The PSR-530 can retain up to 4 complete songs in internal memory, and these can be
selected and played back as described in the preceding section.

• Material recorded on the SONG tracks will be retained even after turning the power
off. See page 98 for the details.
• The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged,
or the batteries fail during recording.
• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

● The SONG MELODY tracks record the following operations and
data:
• Note on/off.
• Velocity.
• R1 and R2 voice number, volume,
octave, pan, reverb send level,
chorus send level, DSP send level.
• Dual voice on/off.
• Reverb on/off.
• Reverb type.

•
•
•
•
•
•

Chorus on/off.
Chorus type.
DSP on/off, variation on/off.
Harmony on/off, type.**
Sustain pedal on/off.
Pitch bend, pitch bend range.

• Up to approximately
4500 notes can be recorded in the PSR530 MELODY tracks.
• Only harmony applied
to the last track recorded will be included in the recorded
song data (see page
42 for details on the
HARMONY effect).

● The SONG ACCOMPANIMENT track records the following operations and data:
• Section changes.
• Style number.*
• Accompaniment track changes*
(8 tracks: track on/off, voice
number, volume, pan, reverb send
level, chorus send level, DSP send
level).

*
**

•
•
•
•
•

Accompaniment volume.*
Chord changes, timing.
Reverb type.
Chorus type.
Tempo and time signature
(common to the ACCOMPANIMENT and MELODY tracks).*

Recorded only at the beginning of a song; changes cannot be made during recording.
Recorded only at the beginning of a song; changes cannot be made during recording. Only one
melody track can be recorded with harmony. The harmony data for the last track recorded with
harmony will be retained (last priority).

• Up to approximately
3500 chords can be
recorded in the ACCOMPANIMENT
track, when the Virtual
Arranger is OFF.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

Song Recording Procedure

1 Set Up to Record
Before recording set up the PSR-530 as required: e.g. select the required
voice(s), effects, accompaniment style, accompaniment fingering mode, etc.

2 Engage the Record Ready Mode
Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record-ready mode. The [RECORD]
button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4]
icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record
modes.

13 UserSng1
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101
VOICE

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

MULTI PAD

BASS

STYLE
FINGERING

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

SONG
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

MINUS ONE

3 Select the SONG Record Mode
Press the [SONG] button to select the SONG record mode. The SONG menu
will automatically be selected and a SONG number will appear on the top line of
the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo, indicating
that the record ready (synchro-start) mode is engaged. Also, the frame surrounding
the song MELODY and ACCOMPANIMENT track icons will flash, indicating that
a MELODY and/or ACCOMPANIMENT track must be selected before recording
can begin.

13 UserSng1
VOICE L

VOICE R2

VOICE

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

REGISTRATION

BASS

MULTI PAD

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

MEASURE

CHORD
1

STYLE
FINGERING
CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

SONG
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

MINUS ONE

VOICE

• The following panel setting changes will occur
when the record ready
mode is engaged:
• The measure number will
be reset to “1”.

101

REPEAT

• If the [RECORD] button is
pressed while a demonstration song or cartridge
song is selected, the lowest-numbered user song
which does not contain
any recorded data will automatically be selected. If
other user songs already
contain data, however,
user song number 13 will
be selected.

• If the Metronome function
is on (page 85), the metronome will sound at the current tempo.
• The REGISTRATION
MEMORY FREEZE function will be turned on (it
cannot be turned off while
the record mode is engaged).

• The SYNCHRO STOP
function wil be turned off.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

4 If Necessary, Select a User Song Number

If the desired user song is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, number
buttons, or data dial to select as required.

5 Select the Track(s) to be Recorded
Use the TRACK buttons to select a SONG MELODY track to record (only one
MELODY track can be recorded at a time). A frame appears continuously around the
icon of the MELODY track selected for recording.

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

• If you start recording
without selecting a specific track while the
panel AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT button is on,
the MELODY 1 and
ACCOMP tracks will automatically be selected
for recording.

VOICE

MINUS ONE

The ACCOMPANIMENT track can be recorded alone or at the same time as one
MELODY track. If you intend to record accompaniment use the appropriate
TRACK button to select the ACCOMPANIMENT track (a frame will appear
continuously around the ACCOMPANIMENT track icon).

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

• The R1 and R2 voices
can be simultaneously
recorded on a single
track. The L voice cannot be recorded.

• The panel AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT [ON/
OFF] button is automatically turned off when the
ACCOMPANIMENT
track is turned off.
• AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT will automatically
be turned on if it is off
when the ACCOMPANIMENT track is selected
for recording. Conversely, the ACCOMPANIMENT track will automatically be selected for
recording if the AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT
[ON/OFF] button is
turned on.

VOICE

MINUS ONE

• AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT cannot be turned
on or off during recording.

6 Record
Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the
[START/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the
current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. The MEASURE parameter will
also show the current measure number during recording.
START/STOP
/
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
MEASURE

ATION

MULTI PAD

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

• If you start recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button,
nothing will be recording on a MELODY track until you begin
playing on the keyboard. Only rhythm accompaniment will be
recorded on the ACCOMPANIMENT track until you play a
chord in the auto accompaniment section of the keyboard.
• During recording you can use the TRACK buttons to turn
playback of previously-recorded MELODY tracks or the ACCOMPANIMENT track on or off as required.

• If the SONG memory becomes full while recording, “FULL”
will appear on the display and recording will stop (the “Rehearsal Mode” will be engaged).

7 Stop Recording
Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. If you press the
[ENDING] button while recording the ACCOMPANIMENT track, recording will
stop automatically after the ending section has finished. When recording is stopped
the MEASURE number on the display will return to “1” and the record-ready mode
will be engaged.
START/STOP
/

• You can also press the
[SYNC START] button to
stop recording and return
to the record ready mode.

ENDING

8 Record Additional Tracks as Required
By repeating steps 5 through 7, above, you can select and record additional
tracks as required.
● Recording from the Middle of the Song
It is possible initiate recording from the middle of the song. If you want to
change the latter half of the song (track), select the Measure number (page 54)
from which you want to record and start recording.

017 Measure

• While the record ready
mode is engaged you can
press the [VOICE] button
to go to the VOICE menu
and change the R1 voice
as required. The R2 voice,
however, cannot be
changed (If the Voice Set
function is on — page 85
— the R2 voice will automatically be changed
when an R1 panel voice is
selected). The recordready mode must be disengaged in order to
change the R2 voice and
other settings.
• When you select one of
the Accompaniment
tracks for recording, the
display shows “- - -:Measure” indicating that recording from the middle of
the song is not possible.

9 Exit From the Record Mode
When you’re finished recording a song, press the [RECORD] button so that its
indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user song can now
be played back in the same way as the demonstration songs (page 52).

• Many types of data recorded in user songs can
be re-written (“revoiced”)
as described on page 81.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

◆ About the Recording with the Digital Effects Applied
You can use three Digital Effects, Reverb, Chorus and DSP, at one time. However,
two or more types from the same group cannot be selected at the same time. Be aware
the following facts especially when recording a song with the different effects applied
to the different tracks.

The Reverb type and Chorus type effects can be set and recorded independently
for each track. However, only the latest settings (one each) will be effective if
several effects are used in a song (the latest setting priority).
[EX.] While the panel REVERB button is turned on:
1. Select the Hall 1 (Reverb) for the Accompaniment track, and record the Accompaniment track for ten measures from the beginning.
2. Start recording on the Melody 1 track with the Hall 1 (Reverb) selected from the
beginning and then change the effect type to Room 1 (Reverb) respectively from
the fifth measure through the end.

When you play back the song recorded with the above condition, the first four
measures will be played back with the Hall 1 applied to both the Accompaniment
and Melody 1 tracks, and the rest six measures, from fifth through the end, with
the Room 1 applied to both tracks. The effect types set for the Accompaniment
track are replaced with the latest settings. Only the Send Levels for each track
remains the same.

The DSP type effects can be set and recorded only for the Melody tracks regardless
of the current effect, insertion or System. Only the latest setting will be effective
if several types are used in a song (the latest setting priority).
[EX.]
1. Turn on the panel DSP button, and start recording on the Melody 1 track with the
Distortion (DSP No.42 Hard) selected for ten measures from the beginning.
2. Turn off the panel DSP button, and start recording on the Melody 2 track without any
effect from the beginning. Then turn on the panel DSP button again at the fifth
measure, and continue recording to the end with the Rotary Speaker1 (DSP No.28
Rotary1) selected.

When you play back the song recorded with the above condition, the first four
measures will be played back with the Distortion applied only to the Melody 1
track, and the rest six measures, from fifth through the end, with the Rotary
Speaker applied only to the Melody 2 track. The DSP type set for the Melody 1
track is taken over by the one set for the Melody 2 track.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Song Recording

Clearing Song Data
This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-530 SONG
memory.

Clearing an Entire Song
While the SONG record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU
[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “SongClr?” function, then press the [+] (YES)
button: “Sure?” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button a second time
to actually clear the currently selected user song (the demonstration songs and
cartridge songs cannot be cleared). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear
operation.

YEs SongClr?

Sure?
7

Clearing Selected Melody Tracks
While the SONG record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU
[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “TrkClr?” function. The SONG tracks icons
corresponding to MELODY tracks which contain data will flash (the ACCOMPANIMENT track cannot be cleared — neither can tracks in demonstration or cartridge
songs). Use the TRACK buttons to select track you want to clear (frame will appear
continuously around the selected track.) Once the desired track has been selected,
“Sure?” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the
currently selected track. Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

TrkClr?
VOICE L

REGIST
MEMORY

0
HARMONY

CHORUS

MIDI

VOICE R2

101

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
MULTI PAD

76
REPEAT

TEMPO

SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

CHORD
1

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

FINGERING
CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

VOICE

MINUS ONE

DIGITAL
EFFECT
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

OVERALL
MINUS ONE

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Style Recording
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-530 lets you record up to three original “user styles” which can be used for autoaccompaniment in the same way as the preset styles. The user styles are recorded as style
numbers 101, 102, and 103, and each style can be recorded with the full complement of 8
tracks (RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, PHRASE
2) and 5 sections (INTRO, MAIN A, MAIN B, ENDING, FILL).

• Material recorded on the STYLE tracks will be retained even after turning the power
off. See page 98 for the details.
• The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged,
or the batteries fail during recording.
• The REGISTRATION MEMORY cannot be recalled during style recording.
• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

● The STYLE tracks record the following operations and data:
•
•
•
•

Note on/off.
Velocity.
Voice number (drum kit number)*
Pitch bend.

• Up to approximately
1,980 notes for a section (totally ca. 3,960
notes) can be recorded in the PSR530 STYLE tracks.

Only one event of the item marked with * can be recorded for each track of the sections.

Style Recording Procedure

1 Select a Style To Begin With
Select a style from one of the 100 presets that is close to the type of style you
want to create.

• If none of the preset styles
is appropriate, select one
that has the same time signature and number of measures as the one you want
to create, then use the “All
Clear” function (page 70) to
clear all preset data before
entering your own.
• If you select a blank user
style to begin with (101 …
103), the style will be in 4/4
time and all sections except
FILL will be 2 measures
long. FILL will be 1 measure long.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

2 Engage the Record Ready Mode

Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record-ready mode. The [RECORD]
button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4]
icons will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record
modes.

13 UserSng1
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101
VOICE

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

REGISTRATION

TEMPO

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

MULTI PAD

BASS

CHORD
1

STYLE
FINGERING
CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

SONG
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

MINUS ONE

3 Select the STYLE Record mode
Press the [STYLE] button to select the STYLE record mode. The STYLE menu
will automatically be selected and a user style number will appear on the top line
of the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo,
indicating that the record ready (synchro-start) mode is engaged. Also, the frame
surrounding the style track icons and the auto-accompaniment section button
(INTRO, MAIN A, MAIN B, and ENDING) indicators will flash, indicating that
a section and track must be selected before recording can begin.

101 UserSty1
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101
VOICE

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
HARMONY

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

TEMPO

STYLE
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

SONG
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

MINUS ONE

INTRO

MAIN/AUTO FILL

ENDING

• The icons of tracks which
already contain data will
appear continuously
rather than flashing when
the STYLE record mode is
selcted.
• If the STYLE record mode
is selectd while a preset
style or cartridge style is
selected, the lowest-numbered user style which
does not contain any recorded data will automatically be selected. If all
user styles already contain data, however, user
style number 101 will be
selected.
• If the STYLE record mode
is selectd while a user
style is selected, that user
style will be selected for
recording.
• The following panel setting changes will occur
when the STYLE record
mode is engaged:
• The measure number will
be reset to “1”.
• If the Metronome function
is on (page 85), the metronome will sound at the current tempo.
• The SYNCHRO STOP
function wil be turned off.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

4 If Necessary, Select a User Style Number

If the desired user style is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, number
buttons, or data dial to select as required.

5 Select a Section to Record
Press the auto-accompaniment section button corresponding to the section you
want to record. Press the MAIN A or MAIN B button twice to record a FILL. The
indicator of the selected section button will light continuously and the others will go
out. (The MAIN A or MAIN B indicator will flash when you designate FILL
recording.)
INTRO

MAIN/AUTO FILL

ENDING

In this case the RHYTHM 1 track will automatically be selected for recording as
the default.
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

PAD

VOICE

PHRASE
1

VOICE

• If you don’t specifically select a section,
the MAIN A section
will automatically be
selected for recording.
• Although the preset
FILL sections have 4
variations (refer to
page 25), user-style
FILL sections can
have only 1. When
using a preset style
as a basis for a user
style, the AA FILL
variation is used.

PHRASE
2

VOICE

MINUS ONE

6 Select a Track to Record
When using a preset style as a basis for a user style, the BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD
2, PAD, PHRASE 1, and PHRASE 2 tracks must be cleared before they can be selected
for recording (see page 70). The RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks can be
“overdubbed” — i.e. new notes can be added without erasing the original data.
Use the TRACK buttons to select the style track you want to record. A frame
appears continuously around the icon of the track selected for recording, and the
frames surrounding the remaining tracks will disappear.

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

MINUS ONE

PAD

VOICE

PHRASE
1

VOICE

PHRASE
2

VOICE

• Only one track can be
recorded at a time.
• If you don’t specifically select a track,
the RHYTHM 1 track
will automatically be
selected when you
start recording.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

7 Select a Voice, If Necessary

If necessary, select a voice for the track to be recorded by pressing the [VOICE]
button and selecting in the normal way.

• The Registration Memory
buttons will be disabled in
the style record mode.

8 Record
Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the
[START/STOP] button. The BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the
current beat, and the MEASURE parameter will show the current measure
number during recording.
START/STOP
/
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
MEASURE

ATION

MULTI PAD

The style will repeat continuously when recording is started, so you can
continue to add (“overdub”) notes until the current track is complete. The style
should be recorded based on a CM7 chord (C Major Seven) in order for it to
function properly when used for auto-accompaniment.

C S C

C = chord tone

C S C C, S = scale tones

Observe the following rules when recording the MAIN and FILL sections:
• Use only the CM7 scale tones when recording the BASS, and PHRASE
tracks (i.e. C, D, E, G, A, and B).
• Use only the chord tones when recording the CHORD and PAD tracks (i.e. C,
E, G, and B).

Any appropriate chord or chord progression can be used for the INTRO and
ENDING sections.

• Before actually starting to
record you can try playing
the PSR-530 the way it is
set up by using the “Rehearsal Mode”: press the
[SYNC START] button to
temporarily disengage the
record ready mode, rehearse as necessary, then
press the [SYNC START]
button again to return to the
record ready mode.
• If the memory becomes full
while recording, “Full” will
appear on the display and
recording will stop (the rehearsal mode will be engaged).
• Even though you can start
recording with the user style
memory space thoroughly
consumed, “Full” will be
shown on the display and
the recording will forcibly be
stopped. In this case, first
exit from the record mode,
next select the unnecessary
user style, and then enter
the record mode again and
execute the Clear function
(see page 70) to secure the
free space to record.
• For recording the RHYTHM
1/2 tracks, the instrument
symbols printed on the front
edge of the panel show you
the instrument assignments
to each key. See Keyboard
Percussion on page 19 for
playing each drum/percussion sound.

9 Stop Recording
Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. When recording is
stopped the MEASURE number on the display will return to “1”.
START/STOP
/

• You can also press the
[SYNC START] button to
stop recording and return to
the record ready mode.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

10 Record Additional Sections & Tracks as Required

By repeating steps 5 through 9, above, you can select and record additional sections
and tracks as required.

11 Exit From the Record Mode
When you’re finished recording a style, press the [RECORD] button so that its
indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user style can now be
used in the same way as the preset styles (page 22).

Drum Cancel
This function makes it possible to erase specific drum instruments from the
RHYTHM 1 and RHYTHM 2 tracks.
While recording either the RHYTHM 1 or RHYTHM 2 track, use the SUB MENU
[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “:Cancel”.

Cancel
Then press the key on the key board corresponding to the instrument you want to
cancel.

• The voice data in specific user style tracks
can be “revoiced” in
the same way as the
preset styles, as described on page 80.
This, however, does
not actually rewrite
the user style data. In
order to actually
change the user style
data first use the
revoice function, then
immediately engage
and disengage the
style record mode
without recording any
data.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

Quantize

Quantization can be used to align notes to the nearest specified beat to tighten up
loose timing.

1 With the style record ready mode (or rehearsal mode) engaged and the tartget style
and its section selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the
“YES:Quantiz?”.

YES Quantiz?
2 Press the [+] (YES) button to engage the quantize function (or [–] to abort). The
current quantize value will appear to the left of “Quantize” on the top line of the
display. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, or data dial to select the desired quantize value
(see the chart below). When the quantize function is executed, all notes in the target
track will be aligned with the nearest note of the corresponding value.

4 Quantize
Quantize Value

Note

Quarter note

Quarter note triplet

Eighth note

Eighth note triplet

Sixteenth note

Sixteenth note triplet

Thirty-second note

One measure of 8th notes before quantization

After quantization

3 Press the SUB MENU [▼] button once so that “ : Execute?” appears on the display.
Then press the [+] (YES) button to execute the quantize function, or the [–] (NO)
button to cancel.

Execute?

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Style Recording

Clearing User Style Data
This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-530 User Style
tracks.

Clearing an Entire Style
While the STYLE record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB MENU
[▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “All Clr?” function, then press the [+] (YES) button:
“Sure?” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button a second time to
actually clear the currently selected user style (the preset styles and cartridge styles
cannot be cleared). Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

YEs All Clr?

Sure?
7

Clearing Selected Style Tracks
While the STYLE record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged and a section is
selected, use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “TrkClr” function. The
style track icons corresponding to tracks which contain data will flash. Use the
TRACK buttons to select track(s) you want to clear (frames will appear continuously
around the selected tracks).

TrkClr?
VOICE L

REGIST
MEMORY

VOICE R2

101
RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
MULTI PAD

HARMONY

TEMPO

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

MINUS ONE

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

OVERALL
MINUS ONE

Once the desired tracks have been selected, “Sure?” will appear on the display.
Press the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected track(s). Press [–]
(NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.
7

PHRASE
2

MULTI PAD

DIGITAL
EFFECT

Sure?

PHRASE
1

1
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

MIDI

PAD

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

BASS

VOICE

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Multi Pad Recording
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
In addition to the preset MULTI PAD sets, the PSR-530 has 4 user-recordable sets that you
can use to store your own creations.

• Material recorded in the MULTI PADs will be retained even after turning the power
off. See page 98 for the details.
• The recorded data will be lost if the power is turned off, the AC adaptor is unplugged,
or the batteries fail during recording.
• The Shortcut functions are not available when one of the Record modes is engaged.

● The MULTI PADs record the following operations and data:
• Note on/off.
• Velocity.
• R1 voice (voice number, volume, reverb send level, chorus send level,
octave, pan).
• Chord match on/off (pad 1…4).

• Up to approximately
100 notes for each
pad can be recorded
in the PSR-530
MULTI PADs.

• Pitch bend, pitch bend range.
• Sustain on/off.

MUTI PAD Recording Procedure

1 Engage the Record Ready Mode
Press the [RECORD] button to engage the record-ready mode. The [RECORD]
button indicator will light, and the SONG, STYLE, and MULTI PAD [1] … [4] icons
will flash, indicating that you must select one of the corresponding record modes.

13 UserSng1
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101
VOICE

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

BASS

MULTI PAD

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

REGISTRATION

CHORD
1

STYLE
FINGERING
CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

SONG
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

MINUS ONE

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Multi Pad Recording

2 Select the MULTI PAD Record Mode

Press any MULTI PAD button ([1] … [4]) to select the MULTI PAD record mode
(the MULTI PAD button you press will be selected for recording). The MULTI PAD
menu will automatically be selected and a user pad set number will appear on the top
line of the display. The beat indicator dots will flash at the currently set tempo,
indicating that the record ready (synchro-start) mode is engaged.
MUTLI PAD

• The DSP effect cannot be turned on during MULTI PAD recording or the MULTI
PAD record standby
mode. If the DSP effect is on when the
MULTI PAD record
mode is engaged, it
will automatically be
turned off.

007 UserPad1
76

VOICE L

REGIST
MEMORY

0
HARMONY

CHORUS

MIDI

101

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
MULTI PAD

VOICE R2

REPEAT

TEMPO

BASS

MULTI PAD

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

RHYTHM RHYTHM
2
1

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

CHORD
1

FINGERING
CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

• If the Metronome
function is on (page
85), the metronome
will sound at the current tempo.

DIGITAL
EFFECT
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

OVERALL
MINUS ONE

3 If Necessary, Select a User Pad Set Number
If the desired user pad set is not already selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons, the
number buttons, or the data dial to select as required.

37 UserPad1

4 If Necessary, Select a MULTI PAD to Record
If the MULTI PAD you pressed in step 2, above, is not the one you want to record,
you can select any other pad at this point simply pressing the appropriate MULTI PAD
button. The selected MULTI PAD icon will appear in the display.
MUTLI PAD

ONE TOUCH
SETTING

MEASURE

MULTI PAD

• If the [RECORD] button is pressed while a
preset pad set is selected, the lowestnumbered user pad
set which does not
contain any recorded
data will automatically
be selected. If other
user pad sets already
contain data, however, user pad number 1 will be selected.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Multi Pad Recording

5 Specify Chord Match if Required

If you record a MULTI PAD with a pitched voice, the Chord Match function
(see page 51) can be specified for that pad by using the SUB MENU buttons to
select the Chord Match function for the corresponding pad (“Pad1Chd” …
“Pad4Chd”) while in the record standby or rehearsal mode, and then using the
[+] button to turn it “On” or “Off” as you like.

• The Chord Match on/off status
can be changed in the SUB
MENU “MULTI PAD” even after exiting the recording mode.

on Pad1Chd

6 Record
Recording will begin as soon as you play a note on the keyboard or press the
[START/STOP] button, and the BEAT indicator dots will begin to indicate the
current beat as in the Auto Accompaniment mode. If you are recording a Chord
Match phrase, be sure to base your phrase on a CM7 chord to ensure proper
Chord Match operation. See page 67 for more details on recording around a
CM7 chord.
START/STOP
/
ONE TOUCH
SETTING
MEASURE

ATION

MULTI PAD

7 Stop Recording
Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button.
START/STOP
/

8 Record Additional Pads as Required
By repeating steps 3 through 7, above, you can select and record additional
pads as required.

9 Exit From the Record Mode
When you’re finished recording pads, press the [RECORD] button so that its
indicator goes out to exit from the record mode. The recorded user pads can now
be played back in the same way as the preset pads (page 49).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Multi Pad Recording

Clearing MULTI PAD Data
This function makes it possible to clear unneeded data from the PSR-530 MULTI
PADs.

Clearing an Entire Pad Set
While the MULTI PAD record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB
MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “BankClr” function, then press the [+] (YES)
button: “Sure?” will appear on the display. Press the [+] (YES) button a second time
to actually clear the currently selected pad set (the preset pad sets cannot be cleared).
Press [–] (NO) if you want to abort the clear operation.

YEs BankClr?

• “- - -: PadClr?” will be
shown on the display
if all the pads for the
selected set are
cleared.

Sure?
7

Clearing Selected MULTI PADs
While the MULTI PAD record-ready or rehearsal mode is engaged use the SUB
MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the “PadClr” function. The MULTI PAD icons
corresponding to pads which contain data will flash (preset pad set data cannot be
cleared).

PadClr?
VOICE L

REGIST
MEMORY

VOICE R2

101

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
MULTI PAD

76
REPEAT

HARMONY

TEMPO

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

Use the MULTI PAD buttons to select the pad you want to clear (the icon
corresponding to the selected pad will flash). “Sure?” will appear on the display. Press
the [+] (YES) button to actually clear the currently selected pad. Press [–] (NO) if you
want to abort the clear operation.
MUTLI PAD

MEASURE

MULTI PAD

• If the pad you selected has already
been cleared, “- - - :
PadClr?” will appear
on the display.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Using Music Cartridges
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-530 features a cartridge slot which accepts pre-programmed Yamaha Music
Cartridges containing style and/or song data. One sample Music Cartridge containing song
data is supplied with the PSR-530. Others are available from your Yamaha dealer.

◆ Inserting a Music Cartridge
With the power OFF, insert the Music Cartridge into the cartridge slot as shown,
and press down firmly until the Cartridge is seated properly (as shown in the
illustration). The Cartridge is shaped so that it will only fit in the slot one way don’t try to force it in the wrong way. Turn the power back ON again after inserting.

For Cartridges without the mark, the
bottom of the serrated edges of the
Cartridge should be even with the panel
edge (not above it).

The triangular mark on the front of the Cartridge
should be completely below the panel edge when
the Cartridge is properly seated.

◆ Music Cartridge Handling Precautions
• Do not leave Music Cartridges in locations which are subject to excessive heat or humidity.
• Do not drop Music Cartridges or subject them to strong shock.
• Do not disassemble Music Cartridges.
• Do not directly touch the Music
Cartridge’s electrical contacts. Persistently touching it may cause to
break electrical contacts or generate
static electricity. Static electric
charges can cause loss of data and
unreliable operation.
• Do not insert objects or cartridges
other than Yamaha Music Cartridges
in the PortaTone cartridge slot. Doing
so can result in serious damage to the
instrument.

• Never attempt to insert or remove a
cartridge when the STAND BY/ON
switch is ON. Doing so can result in
loss of the PSR-530 memory data
(song data/registration memory
data) or complete lack of control.
• The Music Cartridge data may not be
selected or played back correctly, if
the electrical contacts on the Music
Cartridge are affected with dust. If
this happens, insert and remove the
Music Cartridge several times. This
may solve the problem. If the problem still happens, wipe and clean the
electrical contacts on the Music Cartridge with a dry soft cloth.

• Be sure to insert the
Music Cartridge when
you recall the registration settings based on
the cartridge data or
playback the song
based on the cartridge
data. Otherwise, “No
Cart (Cartridge)” will
appear on the display.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Using Music Cartridges

Cartridge Songs
Using Yamaha Music Cartridges (the one supplied with the PSR-530 includes 7
songs, others are available from your Yamaha dealer), the PSR-530 will let you enjoy
listening to automated performances, or function as your “private music tutor,”
allowing you to practice various parts of a piece while the others are played
automatically.

• The included music
cartridge is made exclusively for the PSR530. The data on the
cartridge may not be
played back properly
with the other models.

Cartridge Song Playback

1 Select the Cartridge Menu
Press the [CARTRIDGE] button to select the CARTRIDGE menu (the triangular
indicator will appear next to “CARTRIDGE” to the right of the display). The number
and name of the currently selected cartridge song will appear on the top line of the
display, the CART icon will appear in the upper left corner of the display, and the song
track and volume icons near the bottom of the display will appear framed. The
[START/STOP] indicator will flash.

01 530XG
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

VOICE R1

1
VOICE

STYLE

START/STOP
/

SONG

2 Select a Cartridge Song Number
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, number buttons, or data dial to select the cartridge song
number you want to play. The song number can also be incremented by pressing the
[CARTRIDGE] button: press briefly to increment by one, or hold for continuous
incrementing.
1

0
NO

YES

• Cartridge song numbers can also be selected from the SONG
menu as follows:
press and hold the
number [3] button until the cartridge icon
appears in the display, then enter the
number of the cartridge song you want
to select via the number buttons in the normal way.
• The cartridge songs
can also be selected
from the SONG menu
by using the [–] and
[+] buttons or data
dial to go beyond the
highest or lowest internal song numbers
— e.g. pressing the
[+] button while internal song number 16 is
selected will select
cartridge song number 1 (the cartridge
icon will appear).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Using Music Cartridges

3 Start Playback

Playback will begin as soon as the [START/STOP] button is pressed. You can turn
the MELODY and ACCOMPANIMENT tracks on and off during playback as required
by using the TRACK buttons.

• Playback can be
started from any measure — page 54.
• The playback tempo
can be changed freely
as required.

START/STOP
/

• Cartridge song data
cannot be revoiced.
• You may not be able
to play back the cartridge songs properly
just after turning the
power on since it
takes for a while for
the PSR-530 to read
the cartridge data.

Cartridge Accompaniment Styles
Optional Style Music Cartridges provides extra accompaniment styles that can be
used in the same way as the internal accompaniment styles after pressing the [STYLE]
button to select the STYLE menu.
Cartridges which contain both song and style data require a slightly different style
selection procedure: Press and hold the number [3] button until the cartridge icon
appears to the left of the style name in the display, then enter the number of the
cartridge style you want to select via the number buttons or data dial in the normal way.
The cartridge styles can also be selected by using the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial
to go beyond the highest or lowest internal style numbers — e.g. pressing the [+]
button while internal style number 100 is selected will select cartridge style number
01 (the cartridge icon will appear).
The cartridge styles are used in exactly the same way as the internal accompaniment
styles (page 22).

VOICE

STYLE

SONG

0
NO

YES

• Some cartridge styles,
for example, have A
and B intro and ending sections as well
as A and B main sections. In such a case,
if the [INTRO] and
MAIN/AUTO FILL [A]
buttons are pressed in
order to start the accompaniment with an
introduction and then
go to the main A section, the intro A section will play. If the
[INTRO] and MAIN/
AUTO FILL [B] buttons are pressed, the
intro B section will
play. A similar situation applies to endings: if the main A or
B section is playing
and the [ENDING]
button is pressed, the
ending A or B section
will play accordingly.
• You may not be able
to select the cartridge
styles just after turning the power on
since it takes for a
while for the PSR-530
to read the cartridge
style data.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Revoicing
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
The PSR-530 REVOICE function lets you change the following parameters for the R1, R2
and L voices, the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT tracks, and the user SONG tracks.

● Revoice Parameters
Parameter

Display

Range

Comments

Voice

Voice Name

1 … 692

Assigns a voice number to the specified PSR-530 voice or track.

Volume

0 … 127

Sets the volume of the specified PSR-530 voice or track.

Octave

–2 … 2

Shifts the pitch of the specified voice or track up or down by one
or two octaves. A setting of “0” produces normal pitch.

Pan

–7 … 7

Positions the sound of the specified voice or track from left to right
in the stereo sound field. “–7” is full left, “7” is full right, “0” is center,
and all other settings are corresponding positions in between.

Reverb Send Level

RevSndLv

0 … 127

Sets the reverb send level for the specified voice or track, and
thus the amount of reverb effect applied to that voice or track.

Chorus Send Level

ChoSndLv

0 … 127

Sets the chorus send level for the specified voice or track, and
thus the amount of chorus effect applied to that voice or track.

DSP Send Level

DspSndLv

0 … 127

Sets the DSP send level for the specified voice or track, and thus
the amount of DSP effect applied to that voice or track.

Revoicing the R1, R2, and L Voices

1 Select the VOICE REVOICE Mode
While the VOICE menu is selected, press the [REVOICE] button (actually, the
order here is not important: you can also press the [VOICE] button after pressing the
[REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE] button indicator will light and a frame will
appear around the R1 voice icon in the display (i.e. the R1 voice is initially selected
for revoicing).

001 GrandPno
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

VOICE

REPEAT

REVERB TRANSPOSE

116
HARMONY

CHORUS

TEMPO

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

• The VOICE REVOICE
mode cannot be selected while one of
the record modes is
engaged.

VOICE R1

CHORD
1

STYLE
FINGERING
CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

SONG
REVOICE
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

• The VOICE REVOICE
mode will automatically be selected if the
[REVOICE] button is
pressed while any
menu other than
STYLE or SONG is
selected.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Revoicing

2 If Necessary Select a Voice to Revoice

Use the three rightmost TRACK buttons to select the voice you want to
revoice: L, R2, or R1. A frame will appear around the icon of the selected voice.

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

• The TRACK button below
the selected voice can be
used to turn the voice on or
off. Make sure that the
voice is turned on if you
want to monitor the sound
while revoicing (the R1
voice cannot be turned off).

TRACK

3 Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters
Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter. The
name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the
right of the parameter’s current value. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number
buttons, or the data dial to set the parameter’s value as required. Refer to the
“Revoice Parameters” chart on page 78.

001 GrandPno

• You can jump directly to the
REVOICE R2 VOICE display by pressing and holding the [DUAL VOICE] button for a few seconds.
• You can jump directly to the
REVOICE L VOICE display
by pressing and holding the
[SPLIT VOICE] button for a
few seconds.

100 Volume
0 Octave
0 Pan
100 RevSndLv
100 ChoSndLv
100 DspSndLv

4 Repeat as Required and Exit When Done
Repeat steps 2 and 3, above, to revoice the voices as required, then press the
[REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE
mode.

REVOICE

• Minus settings for the Octave and Pan parameters
can be directly entered by
pressing the appropriate
number button while holding the [–] button.
• When the DSP type is set
as insertion, the DSP depth
parameter cannot be
changed.
• The REVOICE mode will
automatically be exited if
the MENU [▲ ] and [▼ ] buttons are used to select any
of the menus to the left of
the display, or if the [CARTRIDGE] button is pressed.
• Save any revoice settings
you want to keep to the
PSR-530 REGISTRATION
MEMORY (page 47). The
revoice setting are temporary and will be lost if the
power is turned off, a different R1 panel voice is selected while the Voice Set
function is on, or a REGISTRATION MEMORY is recalled.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Revoicing

Revoicing a Style

1 Select the STYLE REVOICE Mode
While the STYLE menu and the style you want to revoice are selected, press the
[REVOICE] button (actually, the order here is not important: you can also press
the [STYLE] button after pressing the [REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE]
button indicator will light and a frame will appear around the RHYTHM 1 track
icon in the display (i.e. the RHYTHM 1 track is initially selected for revoicing).

• The STYLE REVOICE
mode cannot be selected
while one of the record
modes is engaged.

201 Std.Kit1
VOICE L

VOICE R2

101

116
CHORUS

TEMPO

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

MEASURE

REGISTRATION

MULTI PAD

1
SYNC
STOP

DSP

• The STYLE REVOICE
mode cannot be selected
while a song or voice is
being revoiced during
song playback.

VOICE

REVERB TRANSPOSE

HARMONY

VOICE R1

REPEAT

CHORD
1

STYLE
FINGERING
CHORD
2

PAD

PHRASE
1

PHRASE
2

SONG
REVOICE
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

• The STYLE REVOICE
mode can even be selected by pressing the
[REVOICE] button while
an accompaniment is
playing.

VOICE

• The Registration Memory
Freeze function will automatically be turned on
when entering the Style
Revoice Mode.

2 Select the Section(s) to be Revoiced
Press INTRO, MAIN A/B or ENDING button(s) to select the section(s).
• Style revoicing affects all
sections of the selected
style.

3 If Necessary Select a Track to Revoice
Use the TRACK buttons to select the accompaniment track you want to revoice:
RHYTHM 1, RHYTHM 2, BASS, CHORD 1, CHORD 2, PAD, PHRASE 1, or
PHRASE 2. A frame will appear around the icon of the selected track.

RHYTHM RHYTHM
1
2

BASS

CHORD
1

CHORD
2

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

PAD

VOICE

PHRASE
1

VOICE

PHRASE
2

VOICE

• The TRACK button below
the selected track can be
used to turn the track on
or off. Make sure that the
track is turned on if you
want to monitor the sound
while revoicing.
• Only drum kits (voice
numbers 127 … 136) can
be selected for the
RHYTHM 1 track.
• Any voice can be selected
for the RHYTHM 2 track,
but please note that the
RHYTHM 2 track is not affected by the AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT feature.

TRACK

• The OCTAVE parameter
and the DSP send level
cannot be edited in the
STYLE REVOICE mode.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Revoicing

4 Select and Edit the Revoice Parameters

Use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired parameter. The
name of the selected parameter will appear on the top line of the display to the
right of the parameter’s current value. Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number
buttons, or the data dial to set the parameter’s value as required. Refer to the
“Revoice Parameters” chart on page 78.

• “- - -” will appear on the top
line of the display if you select an accompaniment
track which contains no
data for revoicing, and
revoicing will not be possible.
• Minus settings for the Octave and Pan parameters
can be directly entered by
pressing the appropriate
number button while holding the [–] button.

5 Repeat as Required and Exit When Done
Repeat steps 2 and 4, above, to revoice the tracks as required, then press the
[REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE
mode.

• When a voice (especially
bass voices) used for a
Style is changed from the
XG Voice to the Panel
Voice using the Revoice
function, the octave played
for the voice may change.
• The REVOICE mode will
automatically be exited if
the MENU [▲ ] and [▼ ] buttons are used to select any
of the menus to the left of
the display, or if the [CARTRIDGE] button is pressed.

REVOICE

• Save any revoice settings
you want to keep to the
PSR-530 REGISTRATION
MEMORY (page 47). The
revoice setting are temporary and will be lost if the
power is turned off, a different style is selected, or a
REGISTRATION MEMORY
is recalled.

Revoicing a User Song

1 Select the SONG REVOICE Mode
While the SONG menu and the user song you want to revoice are selected, press
the [REVOICE] button (actually, the order here is not important: you can also
press the [SONG] button after pressing the [REVOICE] button). The [REVOICE] button indicator will light and a frame will appear around the MELODY
1 track icon in the display (i.e. the MELODY 1 track is initially selected for
revoicing).

VOICE

• The pre-programmed internal songs and cartridge
songs cannot be revoiced.
• The SONG REVOICE mode
cannot be selected while
one of the record modes is
engaged.

SONG
MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

• Revoicing a user song actually rewrites the recorded
song data, so the original
data will be lost.

VOICE

MINUS ONE

REVOICE

• The SONG REVOICE mode
cannot be selected while a
style or voice is being
revoiced during accompaniment style playback.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Revoicing

2 If Necessary Select a Track to Revoice

Use the TRACK buttons to select the SONG track you want to revoice:
MELODY 1 … MELODY 4, or ACCOMP. A frame will appear around the icon
of the selected track.

MELODY MELODY MELODY MELODY ACCOM1
2
3
4 PANIMENT

VOICE

• The TRACK button below the
selected track can be used to
turn the track on or off. Make
sure that the track is turned on if
you want to monitor the sound
while revoicing.
• The revoicing cannot be executed when the memory space
is almost full with the user
songs.

MINUS ONE

• When you revoice the user song
data during its playback and exit
from the REVOICE mode, the
song will automatically be
stopped.

100 RevSndLv
Use the [–] and [+] buttons, the number buttons, or the data dial to set the
parameter’s value as required. Refer to the “Revoice Parameters” chart on
page 78.

70 RevSndLv

0
NO

YES

• “- - -” will appear on the top line
of the display if you select a
song track which contains no
data for revoicing, and revoicing
will not be possible.
• Only the Volume parameter can
be revoiced for the ACCOMPANIMENT track. If you attempt to
change any other parameter “- -” will appear on the top line of
the display and revoicing will
not be possible.
• If the R1 and R2 voices have
been recorded to a single track,
only the R1 voice can be
revoiced.
• Minus settings for the Octave
and Pan paraneters can be directly entered by pressing the
appropriate number button
while holding the [–] button.
• Only one song revoice parameter can be recorded per track.
If you revoice a song while playing back the song, only the lastentered data will be recorded.

4 Repeat as Required and Exit When Done
Repeat steps 2 and 3, above, to revoice the tracks as required, then press the
[REVOICE] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the REVOICE
mode.

REVOICE

• The REVOICE mode will automatically be exited if the MENU
[▲ ] and [▼] buttons are used to
select any of the menus to the
left of the display, or if the
[CARTRIDGE] button is
pressed.
• Since revoicing a user song actually rewrites the song data,
the revoiced song will remain in
memory as long as a working
set of batteries is installed in the
PSR-530, or the AC adapter is
connected.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
Overall Functions
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Some of the functions in the OVERALL function group have already been described in
appropriate sections of this manual. Others will be introduced for the first time in this section.
Refer to the chart below for the page numbers on which each function is described. The chart
also lists the full name of each function, the abbreviated name which appears on the display,
and the available settings or range of settings. Ranges are indicated by two or more values
separated by ellipsis (…).

Function

Display

Settings

Page

TouchSns

0 … 127

PBRange

01 … 12

Master Tuning

Tuning~~

–50 … +50

Scale Tuning Note

SC.Note~

C…b

Scale Tuning

SC.Tune~

–64 … 63

Song Transpose

SongTrns

–12 … +12

Metronome

Metronom

oFF, on

Split Voice Split Point

S.Split~

0 … 127

Accompaniment Split Point

AccSpPnt

0 … 127

Fingering Mode

FngrngMd

SF, F1, F2, FuL, MuL

Voice Set

VoiceSet

oFF, on

Touch Sensitivity
Pitch Bend Range

To access an OVERALL function first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move
the triangular indicator in the display next to “OVERALL”.
MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT
OVERALL

Then use the SUB MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to select the desired function from
within the OVERALL menu. When a function is selected the current setting will
appear to the left of the function name on the top line of the display. Once the function
has been selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial (or number buttons, where
applicable) to set the function as required.

100 TouchSns

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Overall Functions

■ Touch Sensitivity

This function sets the keyboard touch sensitivity. The range is from “0” to “127”.
The higher the value the higher the sensitivity. When the touch sensitivity value is set
to “0”, “oFF” appears in the display and the same volume is produced no matter how
hard you play the keys. — this setting can produce a more realistic effect with voices
that normally do not have touch response: e.g. organ and harpsichord.

100 TouchSns
■ Pitch Bend Range
See page 45.

■ Master Tuning
The Tuning function sets the overall pitch of the PSR-530 over a ±100 cent range
(from –100 to +100) in 1-cent increments. Since 1 cent is 1/100th of a semitone, the
total tuning range is from a semitone below normal pitch to a semitone above normal
pitch.

000 Tuning

• The “normal” tuning
value (“0”) can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the
[–] and [+] buttons.
• Minus values can be
entered by using the
number buttons while
holding the [–] button.

■ Scale Tuning
Scale tuning allows each individual note of the octave to be tuned over range from
–64 to +63 cents in 1-cent increments (1 cent = 1/100th of a semitone). This makes it
possible to produce subtle tuning variations, or tune the instrument to totally different
scales (e.g. classic or Arabic scales).
First use the SC.Note function to select the note to be tuned. The range is from C
to b: C, db, d, Eb, E, F, Gb, G, Ab, A, bb, b.

C SC.Note
note

db Eb Gb Ab bb
Db Eb
C# D#
C

note

Gb Ab Bb
F# G# A#
E

C d E F G A b

Then use the SC.Tune function to tune the selected note as required.

-50 SC.Tune
84

• The scale tuning settings are common to
each octave on the
keyboard.
• The Accompaniment
and Multi Pad sound
is affected by Scale
Tuning.
• The “normal” tuning
value (“0”) can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the
[–] and [+] buttons.
• Minus values can be
entered by using the
number buttons while
holding the [–] button.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
Overall Functions

■ Song Transpose

This function allows you to transpose only the song to be played back. That means
you can play along with your desired song (Minus-one function) in the desired key
without affecting your performance.

02 SongTrns

■ Metronome
When turned “on” the PSR-530 metronome will sound during AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT playback as well as SONG playback and recording.

on Metronom

• Since the Transpose
function (page 46)
sets the overall transpose value, if it is
changed, the Song
Transpose value will
be changed by the
same amount at the
same time.
• The “normal” transpose value (“00”) can
be recalled by simultaneously pressing
the [–] and [+] buttons.
• Minus values can be
entered by using the
number buttons while
holding the [–] button.
• The Song Transpose
value is automatically
set to “00” when the
record mode is engaged.

■ Split Voice Split Point
See page 21.

■ Accompaniment Split Point
See page 29.

■ Fingering Mode
See page 30.

■ Voice Set
The VOICE SET feature brings out the best in each individual voice by automatically setting a range of important voice-related parameters whenever an R1 panel
voice (voice numbers 1 … 200) is selected. The parameters that may be set by the
VOICE SET feature are listed below. This function lets you turn VOICE SET on or off,
as required.

• The Voice Set function is on by default
when the power is initially turned on.

on VoiceSet
● Voice Set parameter list
• R1 Voice (Volume, Pan)
• R2 Voice (Voice number, volume, octave, pan, reverb
send level, chorus send level, DSP send level)
• DSP return level
• Harmony type, volume
• Pitch Bend Range

The parameter below is set whether or not the voice set
function is on or off.
• R1 Voice (Octave, reverb send level, chorus send level,
DSP send level)
• Reverb ON/OFF
• Chorus ON/OFF
• DSP ON/OFF, variation ON/OFF
• DSP type

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
MIDI Functions
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
In the rear panel of your PSR-530, there are MIDI terminals (MIDI IN, MIDI OUT), a TO HOST
terminal, and a HOST SELECT switch. By using the MIDI functions you can expand your
musical possibilities. This section explains what MIDI is, and what it can do, as well as how
you can use MIDI on your PSR-530.

What’s MIDI?
No doubt you have heard the terms “acoustic instrument” and “digital instrument.”
In the world today, these are the two main categories of instruments. Let’s consider an
acoustic piano and a classical guitar as representative acoustic instruments. They are
easy to understand. With the piano, you strike a key, and a hammer inside hits some
strings and plays a note. With the guitar, you directly pluck a string and the note
sounds. But how does a digital instrument go about playing a note?
● Acoustic guitar note production

● Digital instrument note production

Sampling
Note

Tone Generator
(Electronic circuit)

Sampling
Note

Playing the keyboard

Pluck a string and the body resonates the
sound.

Based on playing information from the keyboard, a
sampling note stored in the tone generator is played
through the speakers.

As shown in the illustration above, in an electronic instrument the sampling note
(previously recorded note) stored in the tone generator section (electronic circuit) is
played based on information received from the keyboard. So then what is the
information from the keyboard that becomes the basis for note production?
For example, let’s say you play a “C” quarter note using the grand piano sound on
the PSR-530 keyboard. Unlike an acoustic instrument that puts out a resonated note,
the electronic instrument puts out information from the keyboard such as “with what
voice,” “with which key,” “about how strong,” “when was it pressed,” and “when was
it released.” Then each piece of information is changed into a number value and sent
to the tone generator. Using these numbers as a basis, the tone generator plays the
stored sampling note.
Example of Keyboard Information
Voice number (with what voice)
Note number (with which key)
Note on (when was it pressed) and
note off (when was it released)
Velocity (about how strong)

01 (grand piano)
60 (C3)
Timing expressed numerically (quarter note)
120 (strong)

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which
allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending
and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other
types of MIDI data, or messages.
The PSR-530 can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and
various types of controller data. The PSR-530 can be controlled by the incoming MIDI
messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI channels,
voices and effects, change parameter values and of course play the voices specified for
the various parts.
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System
messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the
PSR-530 can receive/transmit.

● Channel Messages
The PSR-530 is an electronic instrument that can handle 16 channels. This is
usually expressed as “it can play 16 instruments at the same time.” Channel
messages transmit information such as Note ON/OFF, Program Change, for each
of the 16 channels.
Message Name

PSR-530 Operation/Panel Setting

Note ON/OFF

Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played.
Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based
on how hard the key is stuck.

Program Change

Voice setting (control change bank select MSB/LSB setting)

Control Change

Revoice setting(volume, pan pot, etc.)

● System Messages
This is data that is used in common by the entire MIDI system. System messages
include messages like Exclusive Messages that transmit data unique to each
instrument manufacturer and Realtime Messages that control the MIDI device.
Message Name

PSR-530 Operation/Panel Setting

Exclusive Message

Reverb/chorus/DSP settings, etc.

Realtime Messages

Clock setting
Start/stop operation

The messages transmitted/received by the PSR-530 are shown in the MIDI Data
Format and MIDI Implementation Chart on pages 110 and 122.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

◆ MIDI Terminal/TO HOST Terminal
In order to exchange MIDI data between multiple devices, each device must
be connected by a cable.
There are two ways to connect: from the MIDI terminals of the PSR-530 to the
MIDI terminals of an external device using a MIDI cable, or from the TO HOST
port of the PSR-530 to the serial port of a personal computer using a special cable.
If you connect from the PSR-530 TO HOST terminal to a personal computer,
the PSR-530 will be used as a MIDI interface device, meaning that a specialized
MIDI interface device is not necessary.
In the rear panel of the PSR-530, there are two kinds of terminals, the MIDI
terminals and the TO HOST terminal.
• MIDI IN ......... Receives MIDI data from another MIDI device.
• MIDI OUT ..... Transmits the PSR-530’s keyboard information as MIDI data to another
MIDI device.
• TO HOST ...... Transmits and receives MIDI data to and from a personal computer.

••••••••••••••••

TO HOST

MIDI • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
OUT

What You Can Do with MIDI
● Remotely play another PSR-530
MIDI transmit
MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

PSR-530

PSR-530
MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI receive

Bulk send/receive (page 95).

● Save/load song and registration memory data to/from the MDF2
MIDI transmit
MIDI OUT

Save/load data
MIDI IN

PSR-530
MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI receive

Bulk send/receive (page 95).

MDF2

• When using the TO HOST
terminal to connect to a
personal computer using
Windows, a Yamaha MIDI
driver must be installed in
the personal computer.
The Yamaha MIDI driver
can be obtained at
Yamaha’s home page on
the World Wide Web,
.
• Special MIDI cables (sold
separately) must be used
for connecting to MIDI devices. They can be bought
at music stores, etc.
• Never use MIDI cables
longer than about 15
meters. Cables longer
than this can pick up
noise which can cause
data errors.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

● Use the PSR-530 as a multi tone generator (playing 16 channels at one time).
Receive mode for all channels
set to “normal.”

Available disks

PSR-530
MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI receive

MDF2, QY700,
Personal computer, etc.

MIDI receive settings (page 93).

[ex.] XG song
floppy disks

● Play music from another keyboard (no tone generator) using the PSR-530 XG tone
generator.
MIDI receive
PSR-530

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI keyboard with no
tone generator

MIDI receive settings (page 93).
Clock settings (page 94).

● Record performance data (1-16 channels) using the PSR-530 Auto Accompaniment
and Multi Pad features on a external sequencer (such as a personal computer). After
recording, edit the data with the sequencer, then play it again on the PSR-530
(playback).
Can be used to edit and arrange
after recording

• When using a personal computer, special software (sequencer software) is
needed.

MIDI transmit
MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

PSR-530
MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

MIDI receive
(playback)

Personal computer,
MDF2, QY700, etc.

MIDI transmit setting (page 92).
Initial send (page 95).

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

Connecting to a Personal Computer
(TO HOST Terminal/HOST SELECT Switch)
You can enjoy using personal computer music software when you connect your
PSR-530’s TO HOST terminal or MIDI terminals to a personal computer.
There are two ways to connect.
● Connect using the PSR-530 MIDI terminals.
● Connect using the TO HOST terminal.

■ Connect using the PSR-530 MIDI terminals
Using a MIDI interface device installed in the personal computer, connect the MIDI
terminals of the personal computer and the PSR-530.
For the connection cable, use a special MIDI cable.
● When the computer has a MIDI interface installed, connect the MIDI OUT
terminal of the personal computer to the MIDI IN terminal of the PSR-530. Set the
HOST SELECT switch to “MIDI.”
Computer (sequencer software)

PC-1
Mac

MIDI OUT

MIDI IN

PC-2
MIDI

PSR-530

MIDI OUT

● When using a MIDI interface with a Macintosh series computer, connect the RS422 terminal of the computer (modem or printer terminal) to the MIDI interface,
then connect the MIDI OUT terminal on the MIDI interface to the MIDI IN
terminal of the PSR-530, as show in the diagram below.
Set the HOST SELECT switch on the PSR-530 to “MIDI.”
Computer (sequencer software)

PC-1
Mac

MIDI interface
RS-422

MIDI IN

MIDI OUT

PSR-530

PC-2
MIDI

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

• When the HOST SELECT switch is set in the “MIDI” position, input and output in the TO HOST
switch is ignored.
• When using a Macintosh series computer, set the MIDI interface clock setting in the
application software to match the setting of the MIDI interface you are using. For details,
carefully read the owner’s manual for the software you are using.

■ Connect using the TO HOST terminal
Connect the serial port of the personal computer (RS-232C terminal or RS-422
terminal) to the TO HOST terminal of the PSR-530.
For the connection cable, use the cable below (sold separately) that matches the
personal computer type.
Macintosh Series
Connect the RS-422 terminal (modem or printer terminal) on the computer to the TO HOST terminal
on the PSR-530 using a serial cable (system peripheral cable, 8 bit). Set the PSR-530 HOST
SELECT switch in the “MAC” position.

mini DIN 8-pin

PC-1
Mac

PC-2
MIDI

• Set the MIDI interface clock in the sequencer software you are using to 1 MHz. For details, carefully read
the owner’s manual for the software you are using.

IBM-PC/AT Series
Connect the RS-232C terminal on the computer to the TO HOST terminal on the PSR-530 using
a serial cable (D-SUB 9P —> MINI DIN 8P cross cable). Set the PSR-530 HOST SELECT switch
in the “PC-2” position.
PC-1
Mac

mini DIN 8-pin

PC-2
MIDI

• If you connect from
the PSR-530 TO
HOST terminal to a
personal computer,
the PSR-530 will be
used as a MIDI interface device, meaning
that a specialized
MIDI interface device
is not necessary.
• When the HOST SELECT switch is set to
“MAC,” “PC-1,” or
“PC-2,” don’t use the
MIDI IN/OUT terminals. (MIDI data cannot be sent or received through the
MIDI terminals).
• “Host is Offline!!” will
be shown on the display, when the Host
Select switch is set
appropriately and the
serial cable is connected to the PSR530 TO HOST but not
to the PC’s serial port
(or the cable is properly connected to the
PC which is currently
turned off).

D-SUB 9-pin

• When using a D-SUB 25P —> MINI DIN 8P cross cable, connect using a D-SUB 9P plug adaptor on the
computer side of the cable.

mini DIN 8-pin
D-SUB 25-pin

D-SUB 9-pin

For details about the necessary MIDI settings for computer and sequence software
you are using, see the owner’s manuals for each of them.
Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
IBM PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp.
Other company names and product names, etc. in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of
those companies.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

The PSR-530 MIDI Functions
The PSR-530 has the following MIDI functions.
Function
Transmit Channel

Display

Settings

Page

Tr.Ch~~~

1 … 16

Transmit Track

Tr.Trk~~

r1, r2, L, H1, H2, H3, rH2, rH1,
bAS, CH1, CH2, Pad, PH1, PH2,
S1, S1d, S2, S2d, S3, S3d, S4,
S4d, oFF

Receive Channel

Rcv.Ch~~

1 … 16

Receive Mode

Rcv.Mod~

nor, oFF, rE

Local Control

Local~~~

oFF, on

External Clock

ExtClock

oFF, on

Bulk Data Send

BlkSnd?~

None

Initial Data Send

InitSnd?

None

To access a MIDI function first use the MENU [▲] and [▼] buttons to move the
triangular indicator in the display next to “MIDI”, then use the SUB MENU [▲] and
[▼] buttons to select the desired function from within the MIDI menu. When a
function is selected the current setting will appear on the top line of the display. Once
the function has been selected, use the [–] and [+] buttons or data dial (or number
buttons, where applicable) to set the function as required.

01 Tr.Ch

MIDI

DIGITAL
EFFECT
OVERALL

■ Transmit Channel & Transmit Track
The PSR-530 can simultaneously transmit data on all 16 MIDI channels. The
Transmit Channel and Transmit Track functions determine what PSR-530 data is
transmitted via which MIDI channels.

● Transmit Channel
The “Tr.Ch” function selects a MIDI channel to which a PSR-530 track can be
assigned via the Transmit Track function, below. First select a transmit channel,
then the transmit track for that channel. Different tracks can be assigned to each of
the 16 MIDI channels. Any of the standard MIDI channels - 1 through 16 — can
be specified.

01 Tr.Ch
92

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

● Transmit Track

The “Tr.Trk” function selects the track to be transmitted via the transmit
channel specified by the Transmit Channel function, above. The available
settings are as follows:

r1 Tr.Trk
~r1

R1 keyboard voice.

~r2

R2 keyboard voice

~~L

L keyboard voice.

~H1

Harmony note 1.

~H2

Harmony note 2.

~H3

Harmony note 3.

rH2

Auto accompaniment rhythm 2 track data.

rH1

Auto accompaniment rhythm 1 track data.

bAS

Auto accompaniment bass track data.

CH1

Auto accompaniment chord 1 track data.

CH2

Auto accompaniment chord 2 track data.

Pad

Auto accompaniment pad track data.

PH1

Auto accompaniment phrase 1 track data.

PH2

Auto accompaniment phrase 2 track data.

User song melody track 1 data (R1 voice).

S1d

User song melody track 1 data (R2 voice).

User song melody track 2 data (R1 voice).

S2d

User song melody track 2 data (R2 voice).

User song melody track 3 data (R1 voice).

S3d

User song melody track 3 data (R2 voice).

User song melody track 4 data (R1 voice).

S4d

User song melody track 4 data (R2 voice).

oFF

No data transmitted.

• The initial default channel/track
settings are:
Channel 1 = R1 voice
Channel 2 = L voice
Channel 3 = Bass / Track3
Channel 4 = Chord1 / Track4
Channel 5 = Chord2 / Track5
Channel 6 = Pad / Track6
Channel 7 = Phrase1 / Track7
Channel 8 = Phrase2 / Track8
Channel 9 = Rhythm2 / Track2
Channel 10 = Rhythm1 / Track1
Channel 11 = R2 voice
Channel 12 = Harmony1
Channel 13 = Harmony2
Channel 14 = Harmony3
Channel 15 = Off
Channel 16 = Off
• When a track is assigned to
more than one MIDI channel,
the data from that track is transmitted via the lowest-numbered
channel.
• To avoid MIDI loops which can
cause operational errors, check
the PSR-530 Local Control setting (page 94), and the MIDI
THRU settings of any external
MIDI devices.
• MIDI transmit track settings will
be retained even after turning
the power off. See page 98 for
the details.

■ Receive Channel & Receive Mode
The PSR-530 can simultaneously receive data on all 16 MIDI channels,
allowing it to function as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator. The
Receive Channel and Receive Mode functions determine how each channel
will respond to received MIDI data.

● Receive Channel
The “Rcv.Ch” function selects a MIDI channel to which a receive mode is
to be assigned via the Receive Mode function, below. First select a receive
channel, then the receive mode for that channel. Any of the standard MIDI
channels — 1 through 16 — can be specified.

01 Rcv.Ch
93

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

● Receive Mode

The “Rcv.Mod” function specifies the receive mode for the channel selected
via the Receive Channel function, above. The receive mode settings are as
follows:

nor Rcv.Mod
nor

“Normal”. Received MIDI data is sent directly to the PSR-530
tone generator. If all channels are set to “nor”, the PSR-530
functions as a 16-channel multi-timbral tone generator.

oFF

No MIDI data is received on channels set to “oFF”.

~rE

“Remote”. Received MIDI data is handled in the same way as
data generated by the PSR-530’s own keyboard. In other words,
a remote keyboard could be used to control the PSR-530 AUTO
ACCOMPANIMENT functions, etc.

• MIDI receive mode settings
will be retained even after
turning the power off. See
page 98 for the details.
• The initial default setting for all
channels is “nor.”
• In the Record mode, the Receive mode settings cannot be
set.

■ Local Control
“Local Control” refers to the fact that, normally, the PSR-530 keyboard
controls the internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played
directly from the keyboard. This situation is “Local Control on” since the
internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard. Local control
can be turned off, however, so that the keyboard does not play the internal
voices, but the appropriate MIDI information is still transmitted via the MIDI
OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the
internal tone generator can respond to MIDI information received on channels
set to the “nor” (normal) mode via the MIDI IN connector. This means that
while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the PSR-530 internal
voices, an external tone generator can be played from the PSR-530 keyboard.
The default Local Control setting is “on”.

on Local
■ Clock
Reception of an external MIDI clock signal can be enabled or disabled as
required. When disabled (“off”), all of the time-based functions (Auto Accompaniment, SONG recording and playback, etc.) are controlled by its own
internal clock. When MIDI clock reception is enabled (“on”), however, all
timing is controlled by an external MIDI clock signal received via the MIDI IN
terminal (in this case the PSR-530 TEMPO setting has no effect). The default
setting is “off”.

oFF ExtClock

• Clock is “off” be default when
the power is initially turnd on.
• When Clock is turned “on”,
AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT
playback cannot be started via
the panel [START/STOP] button, or started via the synchro
start function. Also, the MULTI
PAD playback cannot be initiated by pressing the MULT
PADs.
• When External Clock is turned
“On”, “EC” will appear on the
TEMPO display, and tempo
cannot be changed with the
panel button.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
MIDI Functions

■ Bulk Data Send

This function causes the contents of the registration, user song, user style and
user pad memory to be transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. This data can
be saved to memory or disk via a MIDI sequence recorder or MIDI data
recorder, and then reloaded when required. The bulk data can also be sent
directly to a second PSR-530.
To send the bulk data select the “BlkSnd?” function, then press the [+] (YES)
button. “Sure?” will appear on the display. Press [+] (YES) again to begin
transmission of the bulk data. “BkSnd:Rg” (registration data), “BkSnd:Sg”
(user song data), “BkSnd:Pd” (user pad data) and then “BkSnd:Cs” (user style
data) will appear on the display during transmission. “End” will appear on the
display briefly when the transmission has finished.

YES BlkSnd?

• A bulk dump transmission can
be stopped at any time by
pressing the [–] (NO) button.
• No other operations can be
performed during bulk dump
transmission.
• During Style/Song/Multi Pad
playback or in one of the
Record modes, the display
shows “- - -: BlkSnd” indicating
that you cannot execute the
Bulk Data send operation.

Sure?
7

● Receiving Bulk Data
The PSR-530 will automatically receive compatible bulk data from an
external MIDI device as long as no auto accompaniment, multi pad, or song
recording/playback operation is in progress. “BkRcv” will appear on the
display during reception, then “End” will appear briefly when all data has
been received.

BkRcv
End

• No other operations can be
performed during bulk dump
reception.
• If an error is encountered during bulk data reception, “Blk
Err” will appear on the display,
and registration, user song,
user style and user pad
memory will be cleared.
• When a bulk dump is received, the received data replaces any data that was previously in the PSR-530
memory.
• The bulk receive messages
are rejected during playback/
recording.

■ Initial Data Send
Transmits all current panel settings to a second PSR-530 or a MIDI data
storage device. To send the initial data, select the “InitSnd?” function. Press the
[+] (YES) to begin transmission of the initial data.

YES InitSnd?

• During Style/Song/Multi Pad
palyback or in one of the
Record modes, the display
shows “- - -: InitSnd?” indicating that you cannot execute
the initial data send operation.

If you want to have the song play back with the panel settings used for
recording, execute the Initial Data Send function before recording the performance on the PSR-530 to an external sequencer.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Appendix

PSR-530 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure

SUB MENU

FUNCTION

PAGE

GrandPno (R1 voice name) ...................................... R1 voice selection. ......................................... 17

VOICE

8BtPop1 (Style name) ............................................... Accompaniment style selection. ..................... 22

STYLE

VirtArng ✩ .............................................................. Virtual Arranger on/off selection. .................... 27
Quantiz? * ............................................................... Quantize. ........................................................ 69
AllClr? * .................................................................. User style clear (All). ...................................... 70
TrkClr? * .................................................................. User style clear (Track). ................................. 70
Cancel * .................................................................... Drum cancel. .................................................. 68

PeterGun (Song name) ............................................ Song selection. ............................................... 52

SONG

Measure .................................................................... Measure from which to start playback. ........... 54
MinusCh [MinusOne] ✩ .............................................. Minus-one channel setting. ............................ 55
A-b: Repeat ✩ .......................................................... Repeat playback setting. ................................ 57
SongClr? * ............................................................... Song clear. ..................................................... 63
TrkClr? * .................................................................. Track clear. ..................................................... 63

ex
CARTRIDGE

530XG (Song name) .................................................... Cartridge song selection. ................................ 76

REGISTRATION MEMORY

Bank 1 (Bank name) ................................................... Registration bank selection. ........................... 47
REGISTRATION MEMORY Button

ex
MULTI PAD

Fanfare1 (Multi Pad set name) ............................... Multi Pad set selection. .................................. 49
MULTI PAD STOP Button

Pad1Chd .................................................................... Chord match on/off selection (pad 1). ............ 51
Pad2Chd .................................................................... Chord match on/off selection (pad 2). ............ 51
Pad3Chd .................................................................... Chord match on/off selection (pad 3). ............ 51
Pad4Chd .................................................................... Chord match on/off selection (pad 4). ............ 51
BankClr? * ............................................................... Bank clear. ..................................................... 74
PadClr? * .................................................................. Pad clear. ....................................................... 74

MIDI

Tr.Ch .......................................................................... Transmit channel selection. ............................ 92
Tr.Trk ....................................................................... Transmit track selection. ................................ 93
Rcv.Ch ....................................................................... Receive channel selection. ............................. 93
Rcv.Mod .................................................................... Receive mode selection. ................................ 94
Local .......................................................................... Local on/off selection. ..................................... 94
ExtClock ................................................................. External/internal clock selection. .................... 94
BlkSnd? .................................................................... Bulk dump transmission. ................................ 95
InitSnd? ................................................................. Initial panel setting transmission. ................... 95

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
PSR-530 Display MENU/SUB MENU Structure

SUB MENU

FUNCTION

PAGE

Hall 1 [Reverb] (Reverb type name) ......................... Reverb type selection. .................................... 37

DIGITAL EFFECT

REVERB Button

RevRtnLv ................................................................. Reverb return level setting. ............................ 38
ex

Chorus1 [Chorus] (Chorus type name) ..................... Chorus type selection. .................................... 39
CHORUS Button

ChoRtnLv ................................................................. Chorus return level setting. ............................ 39
ex

Hall 1 [DSP] (DSP type name) .................................. DSP type selection. ........................................ 41
DSP Button

DspRtnLv ................................................................. DSP return level setting. ................................. 42
ex

Duet [Harmony] (Harmony type name) ....................... Harmony type selection. ................................. 43
HARMONY Button

HarmVol .................................................................... Harmony volume setting. ................................ 44

OVERALL

TouchSns ................................................................. Touch sensitivity setting. ................................ 84
PBRange .................................................................... Pitch bend range setting. ................................ 45
Tuning ....................................................................... Overall tuning. ................................................ 84
SC.Note .................................................................... Scale tuning (note) setting. ............................. 84
SC.Tune .................................................................... Scale tuning (tune) setting. ............................. 84
SongTrns ................................................................. Song transpose setting. .................................. 85
Metronom ................................................................. Metronome on/off selection. ........................... 85
S.Split .................................................................... Split mode split point selection. ...................... 21
AccSpPnt ................................................................. Auto accompaniment split point selection. ..... 29
FngrngMd

AUTO ACCOMPANIMENT ......... Fingering mode selection. .............................. 30
ON/OFF Button

VoiceSet ................................................................. Voice set on/off selection. .............................. 85

• Sub-menu items with a “ * ” appear only when the record mode is engaged.
• Sub-menu items with a “

✩

” appear only when the record mode is not engaged.

• Sub-menu items with “
” have shortcut access (press and hold the specified button for a few seconds to
jump directly to the associated sub-menu function). In addition to the shortuts listed above, the [DUAL VOICE]
button can be held to jump to the R2 voice revoice function, and the [SPLIT VOICE] button can be held to jump
to the L voice revoice function.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Data Backup & Initialization

■ Data Backup

Except for the data listed below, all PSR-530 panel settings are reset to their initial
settings whenever the power is turned on.
• Registration Memory
• User Song Data
• User Style Data
• User Pad Data
• MIDI Transmit Settings
• MIDI Receive Settings

The data listed above can be backed up — i.e. retained in memory — as long as a
working set of batteries is installed and you keep the following Off/On procedure.
z Turn the power OFF by pressing the [STAND BY/ON] switch.
x Unplug the DC output cable of the PA-6 from the DC IN 10-12V jack on the rear
panel of the PSR-530.
c Then unplug the PA-6 Power Adaptor from the wall AC outlet.
When turning the power ON, simply reverse the procedure.

■ Data Initialization
All data can be initialized and restored to the factory preset condition by turning on the
power while holding the highest (rightmost) white key on the keyboard. “CLr:Back up”
will appear briefly on the display.
STAND BY
ON

CLr Back up

• All registration and
song memory data,
plus the other settings listed above,
will be erased and/or
changed when the
data initialization
procedure is carried
out.
• Carrying out the
data initialization
procedure will usually restore normal
operation if the PSR530 freezes or begins to act erratically for any reason.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

■ Maximum Polyphony

The PSR-530 has 32-note maximum polyphony. This means that it play a
maximum of up to 32 notes at once, regardless of what functions are used.
Auto Accompaniment uses a number of the available notes, so when Auto
Accompaniment is used the total number of notes that can be played on the
keyboard is correspondingly reduced. The same applies to the Dual Voice,
Split Voice, Multi Pad, and Song functions.

• The Voice List includes MIDI program
change numbers for each voice. Use
these program change numbers when
playing the PSR-530 via MIDI from an
external device.
• Some voices may sound continuously
or have a long decay after the notes
have been released while the sustain
pedal (footswitch) is held.

[Panel Voice List]
MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
LSB
Number
Piano
112
0
Grand Piano
112
1
BrightPiano
112
3
Honky Tonk
112
2
Midi Grand
113
2
CP 80
114
4
Galaxy EP
112
5
DX Modern
112
4
Funk EP
115
5
Modern EP
113
5
Hyper Tines
116
5
New Tines
114
5
Venus EP
113
4
Tremolo EP
114
2
Rock Piano
112
7
Clavi
113
7
Wah Clavi
112
6
Harpsichord
113
6
GrandHarpsi
Chromatic Percussion
112
11
Vibraphone
113
11
Jazz Vibes
112
12
Marimba
112
13
Xylophone
112
114
Steel Drums
112
8
Celesta
112
9
Glocken
112
10
Music Box
112
14
TubularBells
112
108
Kalimba
112
47
Timpani
112
15
Dulcimer
Organ
112
16
Jazz Organ1
113
16
Jazz Organ2
112
17
Click Organ
113
17
Dance Organ
115
16
Drawbar Org
115
17
Mellow Draw
116
16
Bright Draw
112
18
Rock Organ1
113
18
Rock Organ2
114
18
Purple Org
116
17
60’s Organ
117
17
Blues Organ
117
16
16+1 Organ
118
16
16+2 Organ
119
16
16+4 Organ
118
17
Elec.Organ

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

LSB

47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

114
114
112
113
112
113
112
112
113
114
112

58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
113
112
113
112
113
114
112
113
114
113
112
113
112
112
115

74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
114
112
112
112
113
119
112
112
113
112
112
113
113
114

89
90
91
92

0
0
0
0

112
113
112
112

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
Number
16
TheatreOrg1
17
TheatreOrg2
19
Pipe Organ
19
ChapelOrgan
20
Reed Organ
21
Trad. Accrd
21
Musette
23
Tango Accrd
23
Bandoneon
21
Soft Accrd
22
Harmonica
Guitar
24
Classic Gtr
24
Spanish Gtr
25
Folk Guitar
25
12StrGuitar
26
Jazz Guitar
26
Octave Gtr
26
HawaiianGtr
27
CleanGuitar
27
Tremolo Gtr
27
Slap Guitar
28
Funk Guitar
28
MutedGuitar
29
FeedbackGtr
29
Overdrive
30
Distortion
27
PedalSteel
Bass
32
Aco.Bass
32
Bass&Cymbal
33
FingerBass
34
Pick Bass
35
Fretless
35
Jaco Bass
17
Organ Bass
36
Slap Bass
37
Funk Bass
36
Fusion Bass
38
Synth Bass
39
Analog Bass
39
Dance Bass
38
Hi Q Bass
38
Rave Bass
Solo Strings
40
Solo Violin
40
Soft Violin
110
Fiddle
41
Viola

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

LSB

93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
112
113
112
112
112
112

101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
113
114
113
114
115
115
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
113
112
113
112

119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
114
113
112
112
114
112
112

127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

113
112
116
117
118
119
113
114
115
113
112
112
113
114

141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
113
112
114
112
116
112
113
113
115
112
112

100

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
Number
42
Cello
43
Contrabass
46
Harp
46
Hackbrett
106
Shamisen
107
Koto
104
Sitar
105
Banjo
Ensemble
48
Strings
48
OrchStrings
48
Symphon. Str
49
SlowStrings
49
Str.Quartet
48
ConcertoStr
49
MarcatoStrs
49
ChamberStrs
44
TremoloStrs
45
PizzStrings
50
Syn Strings
51
Analog Strs
52
Choir
54
Air Choir
52
Vocal Ensbl
53
Vox Humana
53
Gothic Vox
55
Orch.Hit
Solo Brass
56
SoloTrumpet
56
SoftTrumpet
56
Flugel Horn
59
Muted Trp
57
Trombone
57
MelTrombone
60
French Horn
58
Tuba
Brass Ensemble
61
BigBandBrs
61
BrasSection
61
MellowBrass
61
Small Brass
61
Pop Brass
61
MellowHorns
59
BallroomBrs
61
Full Horns
61
High Brass
57
Trb.Section
62
Synth Brass
63
Analog Brs
62
Jump Brass
62
TechnoBrass
Reed
64
Soprano Sax
65
Alto Sax
65
BreathyAlto
66
Tenor Sax
66
BreathTenor
67
BaritoneSax
66
Sax Section
71
Clarinet
71
MelClarinet
66
WoodwindEns
66
Brass Combo
68
Oboe
69
EnglishHorn

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

LSB

154
155

0
0

112
112

156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
112
113
112
112
112
112

164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

112
112
113
112
114
115
113
113
112
116
114
115
117
116
117
118
118
119

182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

113
112
113
112
112
114
112
112
112
115
112
112
112
113
115
113
113
114
113

201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212

127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
126
126

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
Change
Number
70
Bassoon
109
Bagpipe
Pipe
73
Flute
75
Pan Flute
72
Piccolo
73
EthnicFlute
77
Shakuhachi
78
Whistle
74
Recorder
79
Ocarina
Synth Lead
80
Square Lead
81
Saw.Lead
81
Big Lead
98
Stardust
81
Blaster
81
Analogon
80
Vintage Ld
98
Sun Bell
83
Aero Lead
81
Fire Wire
80
Mini Lead
80
Vinylead
81
Warp
80
Hi Bias
80
Meta Wood
80
Tiny Lead
81
Sub Aqua
81
Fargo
Synth Pad
94
Insomnia
90
Krypton
99
Cyber Pad
95
Wave 2001
94
Equinox
88
Stargate
92
DX Pad
93
Loch Ness
88
Fantasia
88
Golden Age
91
Xenon Pad
89
Area 51
99
Atmosphere
89
Dark Moon
94
Ionosphere
93
Phase IV
88
Symbiont
94
Solaris
95
Transform
Drum Kits
0
Std.Kit1
1
Std.Kit2
8
Room Kit
16
Rock Kit
24
Electro Kit
25
Analog Kit
27
Dance Kit
32
Jazz Kit
40
Brush Kit
48
Classic Kit
0
SFX Kit1
1
SFX Kit2

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

[XG Voice List]
Voice
Number

213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
MSB
LSB Change
Number
Piano
0
0
0
GrandPno
0
1
0
GrndPnoK
0
18
0
MelloGrP
0
40
0
PianoStr
0
41
0
Dream
0
0
1
BritePno
0
1
1
BritPnoK
0
0
2
E.Grand
0
1
2
ElGrPnoK
0
32
2
Det.CP80
0
40
2
ElGrPno1
0
41
2
ElGrPno2
0
0
3
HnkyTonk
0
1
3
HnkyTnkK
0
0
4
E.Piano1
0
1
4
El.Pno1K
0
18
4
MelloEP1
0
32
4
Chor.EP1
0
40
4
HardEl.P
0
45
4
VX El.P1
0
64
4
60sEl.P
0
0
5
E.Piano2
0
1
5
El.Pno2K
0
32
5
Chor.EP2
0
33
5
DX Hard
0
34
5
DXLegend
0
40
5
DX Phase
0
41
5
DX+Analg
0
42
5
DXKotoEP
0
45
5
VX El.P2
0
0
6
Harpsi.
0
1
6
Harpsi.K
0
25
6
Harpsi.2
0
35
6
Harpsi.3
0
0
7
Clavi.
0
1
7
Clavi. K
0
27
7
ClaviWah
0
64
7
PulseClv
0
65
7
PierceCl
Chromatic Percussion
0
0
8
Celesta
0
0
9
Glocken
0
0
10
MusicBox
0
64
10
Orgel
0
0
11
Vibes
0
1
11
VibesK
0
45
11
HardVibe
0
0
12
Marimba
0
1
12
MarimbaK
0
64
12
SineMrmb
0
97
12
Balafon2
0
98
12
Log Drum
0
0
13
Xylophon
0
0
14
TubulBel
0
96
14
ChrchBel
0
97
14
Carillon
0
0
15
Dulcimer
0
35
15
Dulcimr2
0
96
15
Cimbalom
0
97
15
Santur
Organ
0
0
16
DrawOrgn
Bank Select

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

LSB

273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

32
33
34
35
36
37
38
40
64
65
66
67
0
24
32
33
37
0
64
65
66
0
32
35
40
64
65
0
40
0
32
0
32
0
64

308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
16
25
43
96
0
16
35
40
41
96
0
18
32
0
32
0
40
41
43
45
0
43
0
40
41
0

MIDI
Program
Change
Number
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
16
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
23
23
Guitar
24
24
24
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
29
29
30
30
30
31

Voice Name
DetDrwOr
60sDrOr1
60sDrOr2
70sDrOr1
DrawOrg2
60sDrOr3
EvenBar
16+2’2/3
Organ Ba
70sDrOr2
CheezOrg
DrawOrg3
PercOrgn
70sPcOr1
DetPrcOr
LiteOrg
PercOrg2
RockOrgn
RotaryOr
SloRotar
FstRotar
ChrchOrg
ChurOrg3
ChurOrg2
NotreDam
OrgFlute
TrmOrgFl
ReedOrgn
Puff Org
Acordion
AccordIt
Harmnica
Harmo 2
TangoAcd
TngoAcd2
NylonGtr
NylonGt2
NylonGt3
VelGtHrm
Ukulele
SteelGtr
SteelGt2
12StrGtr
Nyln&Stl
Stl&Body
Mandolin
Jazz Gtr
MelloGtr
JazzAmp
CleanGtr
ChorusGt
Mute.Gtr
FunkGtr1
MuteStlG
FunkGtr2
Jazz Man
Ovrdrive
Gt.Pinch
Dist.Gtr
FeedbkGt
FeedbGt2
GtrHarmo

MIDI
Program
LSB Change
Number
65
31
66
31
Bass
0
32
40
32
45
32
0
33
18
33
27
33
40
33
43
33
45
33
65
33
0
34
28
34
0
35
32
35
33
35
34
35
96
35
97
35
0
36
27
36
32
36
0
37
43
37
0
38
18
38
20
38
24
38
35
38
40
38
64
38
65
38
66
38
96
38
0
39
6
39
12
39
18
39
19
39
32
39
40
39
41
39
64
39
Strings
0
40
8
40
0
41
0
42
0
43
0
44
8
44
40
44
0
45
0
46
40
46
0
47
Ensemble
0
48
3
48
8
48
24
48

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

335
336

0
0

337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

391
392
393
394

0
0
0
0

Voice Name
GtFeedbk
GtrHrmo2
Aco.Bass
JazzRthm
VXUprght
FngrBass
FingrDrk
FlangeBa
Ba&DstEG
FngrSlap
FngBass2
ModAlem
PickBass
MutePkBa
Fretless
Fretles2
Fretles3
Fretles4
SynFretl
Smooth
SlapBas1
ResoSlap
PunchThm
SlapBas2
VeloSlap
SynBass1
SynBa1Dk
FastResB
AcidBass
Clv Bass
TeknoBa
Oscar
SqrBass
RubberBa
Hammer
SynBass2
MelloSB1
Seq Bass
ClkSynBa
SynBa2Dk
SmthBa 2
ModulrBa
DX Bass
X WireBa
Violin
SlowVln
Viola
Cello
Contrabs
Trem.Str
SlowTrStr
Susp Str
Pizz.Str
Harp
YangChin
Timpani
Strings1
S.Strngs
SlowStr
ArcoStr

101

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

LSB

395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

35
40
41
42
45
0
3
8
40
41
64
65
0
27
64
65
0
0
3
16
32
40
0
0
40
41
64
0
35
64

425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
16
17
32
0
18
0
16
0
0
6
32
37
0
35
40
41
42
0
12
20
24
27
32
45
64
0
18
40
41
45
64

102

MIDI
Program
Change
Number
48
48
48
48
48
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
50
50
50
50
51
52
52
52
52
52
53
54
54
54
54
55
55
55
Brass
56
56
56
56
57
57
58
58
59
60
60
60
60
61
61
61
61
61
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
62
63
63
63
63
63
63

Voice Name
60sStrng
Orchestr
Orchstr2
TremOrch
VeloStr
Strings2
S.SlwStr
LegatoSt
Warm Str
Kingdom
70s Str
Str Ens3
Syn.Str1
ResoStr
Syn Str4
SS Str
Syn.Str2
ChoirAah
S.Choir
Ch.Aahs2
MelChoir
ChoirStr
VoiceOoh
SynVoice
SynVox2
Choral
AnaVoice
Orch.Hit
OrchHit2
Impact
Trumpet
Trumpet2
BriteTrp
WarmTrp
Trombone
Trmbone2
Tuba
Tuba 2
Mute.Trp
Fr.Horn
FrHrSolo
FrHorn2
HornOrch
BrasSect
Tp&TbSec
BrssSec2
HiBrass
MelloBrs
SynBras1
QuackBr
RezSynBr
PolyBrss
SynBras3
JumpBrss
AnaVelBr
AnaBrss1
SynBras2
Soft Brs
SynBrss4
ChoirBrs
VelBrss2
AnaBrss2

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
LSB Change
Number
Reed
0
64
SprnoSax
0
65
Alto Sax
40
65
Sax Sect
43
65
HyprAlto
0
66
TenorSax
40
66
BrthTnSx
41
66
SoftTenr
64
66
TnrSax 2
0
67
Bari.Sax
0
68
Oboe
0
69
Eng.Horn
0
70
Bassoon
0
71
Clarinet
Pipe
0
72
Piccolo
0
73
Flute
0
74
Recorder
0
75
PanFlute
0
76
Bottle
0
77
Shakhchi
0
78
Whistle
0
79
Ocarina
Synth Lead
0
80
SquareLd
6
80
Square 2
8
80
LMSquare
18
80
Hollow
19
80
Shmoog
64
80
Mellow
65
80
SoloSine
66
80
SineLead
0
81
Saw.Lead
6
81
Saw 2
8
81
ThickSaw
18
81
DynaSaw
19
81
DigiSaw
20
81
Big Lead
24
81
HeavySyn
25
81
WaspySyn
40
81
PulseSaw
41
81
Dr. Lead
45
81
VeloLead
96
81
Seq Ana
0
82
CaliopLd
65
82
Pure Pad
0
83
Chiff Ld
64
83
Rubby
0
84
CharanLd
64
84
DistLead
65
84
WireLead
0
85
Voice Ld
24
85
SynthAah
64
85
VoxLead
0
86
Fifth Ld
35
86
Big Five
0
87
Bass &Ld
16
87
Big&Low
64
87
Fat&Prky
65
87
SoftWurl
Synth Pad
0
88
NewAgePd
64
88
Fantasy2

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

514
515

0
0

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
LSB Change
Number
0
89
Warm Pad
16
89
ThickPad
17
89
Soft Pad
18
89
SinePad
64
89
Horn Pad
65
89
RotarStr
0
90
PolySyPd
64
90
PolyPd80
65
90
ClickPad
66
90
Ana Pad
67
90
SquarPad
0
91
ChoirPad
64
91
Heaven2
66
91
Itopia
67
91
CC Pad
0
92
BowedPad
64
92
Glacier
65
92
GlassPad
0
93
MetalPad
64
93
Tine Pad
65
93
Pan Pad
0
94
Halo Pad
0
95
SweepPad
20
95
Shwimmer
27
95
Converge
64
95
PolarPad
66
95
Celstial
Synth Effects
0
96
Rain
45
96
ClaviPad
64
96
HrmoRain
65
96
AfrcnWnd
66
96
Caribean
0
97
SoundTrk
27
97
Prologue
64
97
Ancestrl
0
98
Crystal
12
98
SynDrCmp
14
98
Popcorn
18
98
TinyBell
35
98
RndGlock
40
98
GlockChi
41
98
ClearBel
42
98
ChorBell
64
98
SynMalet
65
98
SftCryst
66
98
LoudGlok
67
98
XmasBell
68
98
VibeBell
69
98
DigiBell
70
98
AirBells
71
98
BellHarp
72
98
Gamelmba
0
99
Atmosphr
18
99
WarmAtms
19
99
HollwRls
40
99
NylonEP
64
99
NylnHarp
65
99
Harp Vox
66
99
AtmosPad
67
99
Planet
0
100 Bright
64
100 FantaBel

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Voice List

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
LSB Change
Number
96
100 Smokey
0
101 Goblins
64
101 GobSyn
65
101 50sSciFi
66
101 Ring Pad
67
101 Ritual
68
101 ToHeaven
70
101 Night
71
101 Glisten
96
101 BelChoir
0
102 Echoes
8
102 EchoPad2
14
102 Echo Pan
64
102 EchoBell
65
102 Big Pan
66
102 SynPiano
67
102 Creation
68
102 Stardust
69
102 Reso Pan
0
103 Sci-Fi
64
103 Starz
Ethnic
0
104 Sitar
32
104 DetSitar
35
104 Sitar 2
96
104 Tambra
97
104 Tamboura
0
105 Banjo
28
105 MuteBnjo
96
105 Rabab
97
105 Gopichnt
98
105 Oud
0
106 Shamisen
0
107 Koto
96
107 T. Koto
97
107 Kanoon
0
108 Kalimba
0
109 Bagpipe
0
110 Fiddle
0
111 Shanai
64
111 Shanai2
96
111 Pungi
97
111 Hichriki
Percussive
0
112 TnklBell
96
112 Bonang
97
112 Gender
98
112 Gamelan
99
112 S.Gamlan
100
112 Rama Cym
101
112 AsianBel
0
113 Agogo
0
114 SteelDrm
97
114 GlasPerc
98
114 ThaiBell
0
115 WoodBlok
96
115 Castanet
0
116 TaikoDrm
96
116 Gr.Cassa
0
117 MelodTom
64
117 Mel Tom2
65
117 Real Tom
66
117 Rock Tom

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

MIDI
Program
Voice Name
LSB Change
Number
0
118 Syn.Drum
64
118 Ana Tom
65
118 ElecPerc
0
119 RevCymbl
Sound Effects
0
120 FretNoiz
0
121 BrthNoiz
0
122 Seashore
0
123 Tweet
0
124 Telphone
0
125 Helicptr
0
126 Applause
0
127 Gunshot
SFX
0
0
CuttngNz
0
1
CttngNz2
0
3
Str Slap
0
16
Fl.KClik
0
32
Rain
0
33
Thunder
0
34
Wind
0
35
Stream
0
36
Bubble
0
37
Feed
0
48
Dog
0
49
Horse
0
50
Bird 2
0
54
Ghost
0
55
Maou
0
64
Tel.Dial
0
65
DoorSqek
0
66
Door Slam
0
67
Scratch
0
68
Scratch 2
0
69
WindChm
0
70
Telphon2
0
80
CarEngin
0
81
Car Stop
0
82
Car Pass
0
83
CarCrash
0
84
Siren
0
85
Train
0
86
Jetplane
0
87
Starship
0
88
Burst
0
89
Coaster
0
90
SbMarine
0
96
Laughing
0
97
Scream
0
98
Punch
0
99
Heart
0
100 FootStep
0
112 MchinGun
0
113 LaserGun
0
114 Xplosion
0
115 FireWork

Bank Select

Voice
Number

MSB

639
640
641
642

0
0
0
0

643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692

64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64
64

103

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Drum Kit List

• “<——” indicates that the drum kit is the same as “Standard Kit1”.
• Each percussion voice uses one note.
• The note numbers and note names printed on the keyboard are one octave higher than
the MIDI note numbers and note names shown in the list. For example, the note number
and note name, #36 and C1, on the keyboard correspond to the MIDI note number and
note name, #24 and C0, shown in the list.
• Voices with the same Alternate Note Number (*1 … 4) cannot be played simultaneously.

Voice #
Bank MSB#
Bank LSB#
Program Change#
MIDI
Note#
Note
13
C#-1 *3
14
D-1
*3
15
D#-1
16
E-1
17
F-1
*4
18
F#-1
*4
19
G-1
20
G#-1
21
A-1
22
A#-1
23
B-1
24
C0
25
C#0
26
D0
27
D#0
28
E0
29
F0
30
F#0
31
G0
32
G#0
33
A0
34
A#0
35
B0
36
C1
37
C#1
38
D1
39
D#1
40
E1
41
F1
42
F#1
*1
43
G1
44
G#1
*1
45
A1
46
A#1
*1
47
B1
48
C2
49
C#2
50
D2
51
D#2
52
E2
53
F2
54
F#2
55
G2
56
G#2
57
A2
58
A#2
59
B2
60
C3
61
C#3
62
D3
63
D#3
64
E3
65
F3
66
F#3
67
G3
68
G#3
69
A3
70
A#3
71
B3
72
C4
73
C#4
74
D4
75
D#4
76
E4
77
F4
78
F#4
79
G4
80
G#4
*2
81
A4
*2
82
A#4
83
B4
84
C5
85
C#5
86
D5
87
D#5
88
E5
89
F5
90
F#5
91
G5

104

201
127
0
0
Standard Kit 1
Surdo Mute
Surdo Open
Hi Q
Whip Slap
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
Finger Snap
Click Noise
Metronome Click
Metronome Bell
Seq Click L
Seq Click H
Brush Tap
Brush Swirl L
Brush Slap
Brush Swirl H
Snare Roll
Castanet
Snare L
Sticks
Bass Drum L
Open Rim Shot
Bass Drum M
Bass Drum H
Side Stick
Snare M
Hand Clap
Snare H
Floor Tom L
Hi-Hat Closed
Floor Tom H
Hi-Hat Pedal
Low Tom
Hi-Hat Open
Mid Tom L
Mid Tom H
Crash Cymbal 1
High Tom
Ride Cymbal 1
Chinese Cymbal
Ride Cymbal Cup
Tambourine
Splash Cymbal
Cowbell
Crash Cymbal 2
Vibraslap
Ride Cymbal 2
Bongo H
Bongo L
Conga H Mute
Conga H Open
Conga L
Timbale H
Timbale L
Agogo H
Agogo L
Cabasa
Maracas
Samba Whistle H
Samba Whistle L
Guiro Short
Guiro Long
Claves
Wood Block H
Wood Block L
Cuica Mute
Cuica Open
Triangle Mute
Triangle Open
Shaker
Jingle Bell
Bell Tree

202
127
0
1
Standard Kit 2
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Snare Roll 2
<——
Snare L 2
<——
<——
Open Rim Shot 2
Bass Drum M 2
Bass Drum H 2
<——
Snare M 2
<——
Snare H 2
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

203
127
0
8
Room Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
BD Room
<——
SD Room L
<——
SD Room H
Room Tom 1
<——
Room Tom 2
<——
Room Tom 3
<——
Room Tom 4
Room Tom 5
<——
Room Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

204
127
0
16
Rock Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
SD Rock M
<——
Bass Drum M
<——
Bass Drum H 3
BD Rock
<——
SD Rock
<——
SD Rock Rim
Rock Tom 1
<——
Rock Tom 2
<——
Rock Tom 3
<——
Rock Tom 4
Rock Tom 5
<——
Rock Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

205
127
0
24
Electronic Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Reverse Cymbal
<——
Hi Q
Snare M
<——
Bass Drum H 4
<——
BD Rock
BD Gate
<——
SD Rock L
<——
SD Rock H
E Tom 1
<——
E Tom 2
<——
E Tom 3
<——
E Tom 4
E Tom 5
<——
E Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

206
127
0
25
Analog Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Reverse Cymbal
<——
Hi Q
SD Rock H
<——
Bass Drum M
<——
BD Analog L
BD Analog H
Analog Side Stick
Analog Snare L
<——
Analog Snare H
Analog Tom 1
Analog HH Closed 1
Analog Tom 2
Analog HH Closed 2
Analog Tom 3
Analog HH Open
Analog Tom 4
Analog Tom 5
Analog Cymbal
Analog Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Cowbell
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Conga H
Analog Conga M
Analog Conga L
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Maracas
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Claves
<——
<——
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Drum Kit List

207
127
0
27
Dance Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Reverse Cymbal
<——
Hi Q
AnSD Snappy
<——
AnBD Dance-1
AnSD OpenRim
AnBD Dance-2
AnBD Dance-3
Analog Side Stick
AnSD Q
<——
AnSD Ana+Acoustic
Analog Tom 1
AnHH Closed-3
Analog Tom 2
Analog HH Closed 2
Analog Tom 3
AnHH Open-2
Analog Tom 4
Analog Tom 5
Analog Cymbal
Analog Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Cowbell
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Conga H
Analog Conga M
Analog Conga L
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Maracas
<——
<——
<——
<——
Analog Claves
<——
<——
Scratch Push
Scratch Pull
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

208
127
0
32
Jazz Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
BD Jazz
<——
SD Jazz L
<——
SD Jazz H
Jazz Tom 1
<——
Jazz Tom 2
<——
Jazz Tom 3
<——
Jazz Tom 4
Jazz Tom 5
<——
Jazz Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

209
127
0
40
Brush Kit
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Brush Slap L
<——
<——
<——
<——
BD Soft
<——
Brush Slap
<——
Brush Tap
Brush Tom 1
<——
Brush Tom 2
<——
Brush Tom 3
<——
Brush Tom 4
Brush Tom 5
<——
Brush Tom 6
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

210
127
0
48

211
126
0
0

212
126
0
1

Classic Kit

SFX 1

SFX 2

<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Bass Drum L2
<——
Gran Casa
Gran Casa Mute
<——
Marching Sn M
<——
Marching Sn H
Jazz Tom 1
<——
Jazz Tom 2
<——
Jazz Tom 3
<——
Jazz Tom 4
Jazz Tom 5
Hand Cym.Open L
Jazz Tom 6
Hand Cym.Closed L
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
Hand Cym.Open H
<——
Hand Cym.Closed H
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——
<——

Guitar Cutting Noise
Guitar Cutting Noise 2
String Slap

Dial Tone
Door Creaking
Door Slam
Scratch
Scratch 2
Windchime
Telephone Ring2

FL.Key Click

Engine Start
Tire Screech
Car Passing
Crash
Siren
Train
Jetplane
Starship
Burst Noise
Coaster
SvMarine

Rain
Thunder
Wind
Stream
Bubble
Feed

Laughing
Screaming
Punch
Heartbeat
Footsteps

Dog
Horse Gallop
Bird 2

Machine Gun
Laser Gun
Explosion
FireWork

Ghost
Maou

105

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

There are three types of digital effects installed in the PSR-530: the reverb effect (system
effect), the chorus effect (system effect) and the DSP effect (can be set as either as a system effect
or insertion effect).
There are basically two ways to use the effects: with the DSP effect set as a system effect or
as a insertion effect. Each different way will be explained here.
Although not all the effect settings cannot be made by operating the PSR-530 panel manually,
some of them may be accessible through MIDI.

■ When DSP type Is Selected as a System Effect
• The three PSR-530 effects will be connected as shown below.
• The signal will enter reverb/chorus/DSP according to the send level set for each, and the signal with the effect
applied will be output according to the return level that is set. The reverb/chorus/DSP send levels are set for
each part (track) with the Revoice mode. The reverb/chorus/DSP return levels value are set in common for
all the parts.
• The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb, chorus and DSP at the output for their signals. Using
MIDI, the panning position for the effect can be set (page 115).
• If a “Send Chorus to Reverb” (page 115) signal is transmitted to the PSR-530 from an external MIDI device,
a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb (connected in series). Also, if a “Send Variation (DSP) to
Reverb” (page 116) signal is transmitted, a signal can be sent from the DSP to the reverb and in the same
way if a “Send Variation (DSP) to Chorus” signal (page 116) is transmitted a signal can be sent from DSP to
the chorus. If these signals are used, the three effects can be connected in series, or used separately, and
a lot of different effects can be produced.

The bold lines are stereo lines.

dry level
volume

expression

R1 Voice

rev send

PAN

REVERB

cho send
DSP send

PAN
reverb
pan

reverb
return

dry level
volume

expression

send chorus to reverb

rev send

PAN

R2 Voice

cho send
DSP send
dry level

volume

expression

L Voice

PAN

CHORUS

rev send

PAN

cho send

chorus
pan

DSP send

chorus
return

send variation to chorus
send variation to reverb

All tracks that
can be revoiced.
dry level
volume

MIDI Channel 1
MIDI Channel 16

expression

DSP
(VARIATION)

rev send

PAN

cho send

PAN

DSP send

variation
pan

DRY LINE

106

DSP
return

OUTPUT

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

■ When DSP type Is Selected as a Insertion Effect
• The three PSR-530 effects will be connected as shown below.

• The signal will enter reverb and chorus according to the send level set for each, and the signal with the effect
applied will be output according to the return level that is set. The reverb and chorus send levels are set for
each part (track) with the Revoice mode. The reverb and chorus return level value is set in common for all the
parts.
• The stereo panning is available for each of the reverb and chorus at the output for their signals. Using MIDI,
the panning position for the effect can be set (page 115).
• If a “Send Chorus to Reverb” (page 115) signal is transmitted to the PSR-530 from an external MIDI device,
a signal can be sent from the chorus to the reverb (connected in series).
• The signal will enter DSP with the Dry/Wet (send level) that is set, and a signal with the effect applied will be
output. The DSP Dry/Wet (send level) is set for only R1 voice with the Revoice mode. The DSP return level
cannot be set.

The bold lines are stereo lines.
Variation is valid for
only one part.
variation part
dry

DSP Dry/Wet

DSP

volume

expression

R1 Voice

rev send

PAN
DSP on/off

cho send

REVERB

reverb
pan
PAN

reverb
return

dry
volume

expression

R2 Voice

rev send

PAN
cho send

send chorus to reverb

dry
volume

expression

L Voice

rev send

PAN
cho send

CHORUS
PAN
chorus
pan

All tracks that
can be revoiced.

chorus
return

OUTPUT

dry

DSP

MIDI Channel 1

expression

rev send

PAN
variation on/off

MIDI Channel 16

volume

cho send

DRY LINE

107

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
About Digital Effects (Reverb/Chorus/DSP)

The Digital Effect List
No.

Effect Type

Features

REVERB
01~04

Hall1~4

System

Concert hall reverb.

05~08

Room1~4

System

Small room reverb.

09, 10

Stage1, 2

System

Reverb for solo instruments.

11, 12

Plate1, 2

System

Simulated steel plate reverb.

OFF

—

No effect.

CHORUS
01~05

Chorus1~5

System

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

06~09

Flanger1~4

System

Pronounced three-phase modulation with a slight metallic sound.

OFF

—

No effect.

DSP

108

01~04

Hall1~4

System

Concert hall reverb.

05~08

Room1~4

System

Small room reverb.

09, 10

Stage1, 2

System

Reverb for solo instruments.

11, 12

Plate1, 2

System

Simulated steel plate reverb.

13, 14

Early Reflection1, 2

System

Early reflections only.

Gate Reverb

System

Gated reverb effect, in which the reverberation is quickly cut off for special
effects.

Reverse Gate

System

Similar to Gate Reverb, but with a reverse increase in reverb.

17~21

Chorus1~5

System

Conventional chorus program with rich, warm chorusing.

22~25

Flanger1~4

System

Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound.

Symphonic

System

Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing.

Phaser

System

Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change.

28~32

Rotary Speaker 1~5

Insertion

Rotary speaker simulation.

33, 34

Tremolo 1, 2

Insertion

Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

Guitar Tremolo

Insertion

Simulated electric guitar tremolo.

Auto Pan

Insertion

Several panning effects that automatically shift the sound position (left, right,
front, back).

Auto Wah

Insertion

Repeating filter sweep “wah” effect.

Delay L, C, R

System

Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions.

Delay L, R

System

Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays.

Echo

System

Stereo delay, with independent Feedback Level controls for each channel.

Cross Delay

System

Complex effect that sends the delayed repeats “bouncing” between the left and
right channels.

Distortion Hard

Insertion

Hard-edge distortion.

Distortion Soft

Insertion

This type is not so hard compared with Distortion Hard.

EQ Disco

Insertion

Discotype equalizer program to boost high and low frequencies.

EQ Telephone

Insertion

Equalizer program which eliminates higher and lower frequencies to simulate
the sounds through telephone.

OFF

—

No effect.

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,
Troubleshooting

Something not working as it should? In many cases what appears to be a malfunction can
be traced to a simple error that can be remedied immediately. Before assuming that your PSR530 is faulty, please check the following points.
PROBLEM
The speakers produce a “pop” sound whenever the power is
turned ON or OFF.

POSSIBLE CAUSE/SOLUTION
This is normal and is no cause for alarm.

The volume is reduced or the sound is distorted.
The registration memory doesn’t work properly.
Recorded song data will not play back properly.

The batteries probably need to be replaced. Either replace all six
batteries, or use an AC power adaptor.

The display goes bland and all panel controls are reset.

No sound when the keyboard is played.

Not all simultaneously-played notes sound.
Auto Accompaniment seems to “skip” when the keyboard is
played.
Auto Accompaniment doesn’t sound when started.

The R1/R2/L voice volume settings could be set too low. Make sure
the voice volumes are set at appropriate levels (pages 14, 79).
The Local Control function could be turned off. Make sure Local
Control is turned on (page 94).
You are probably exceeding the maximum polyphony of the
PSR-530. The PSR-530 can play up to 32 notes at the same time
— including split, dual, auto-accompaniment, song, and multi
pad notes. Notes exceeding this limit will not sound.
The MIDI Clock mode may be set to “on”. Make sure it is turned
“off” (page 94).
Make sure that all accompaniment tracks are turned on, and that
the they are all set to appropriate volume levels.

Auto accompaniment won’t function properly. No lower keyboard sound.

Make sure you are using fingerings recognized by the selected
fingering mode, and are playing in the Auto Accompaniment
section of the keyboard.
Are you sure you’re playing in the Auto-Accompaniment section
of the keyboard? Make sure that the Auto Accompaniment split
point is set appropriately (page 29).
Are you playing chords that the PSR-530 can recognize (see
chord types on page 30)?

The Harmony function will not turn on.

Harmony cannot be turned on when the FULL KEYBOARD
fingering mode is selected or if a percussion kit voice is selected.
Select an appropriate fingering mode or voice.

Certain notes sound at the wrong pitch.

Make sure that the scale tuning value for those notes is set to “0”
(page 84).

A cartridge style or song cannot be selected or will not play
properly.

Make sure that an appropriate Yamaha Music Cartridge is
properly plugged into the cartridge slot (page 75), or the
cartridge contacts are dirty. Try re-inserting the cartridge. If the
contacts are dirty removing and inserting the cartridge several
times will sometimes solve the problem. If this doesn’t work, try
wiping the cartridge connectors carefully with a soft, dry cloth.

Operation of the sustain pedal is reversed.

Sustain pedal operation will be reversed if you turn on the power
or plug in the pedal while pressing the pedal. For normal
operation turn off the power then turn it back on while the pedal
is not pressed.

Individual registration or song memory data transmitted via bulk
dump from an external sequencer or other device is not received
by the PSR-530.

Transmit the data with no more than a 2-second break between
blocks, or transmit as entirely separate data.

109

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

Many MIDI messages listed in the MIDI Data Format are expressed in decimal
numbers, binary numbers and hexadecimal numbers. Hexadecimal numbers
may include the letter “H” as a suffix. Also, “n” can freely be defined as any
whole number.
To enter data/values, refer to the table below.
Decimal
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63

Hexadecimal
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F

Binary
0000 0000
0000 0001
0000 0010
0000 0011
0000 0100
0000 0101
0000 0110
0000 0111
0000 1000
0000 1001
0000 1010
0000 1011
0000 1100
0000 1101
0000 1110
0000 1111
0001 0000
0001 0001
0001 0010
0001 0011
0001 0100
0001 0101
0001 0110
0001 0111
0001 1000
0001 1001
0001 1010
0001 1011
0001 1100
0001 1101
0001 1110
0001 1111
0010 0000
0010 0001
0010 0010
0010 0011
0010 0100
0010 0101
0010 0110
0010 0111
0010 1000
0010 1001
0010 1010
0010 1011
0010 1100
0010 1101
0010 1110
0010 1111
0011 0000
0011 0001
0011 0010
0011 0011
0011 0100
0011 0101
0011 0110
0011 0111
0011 1000
0011 1001
0011 1010
0011 1011
0011 1100
0011 1101
0011 1110
0011 1111

Decimal
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127

Hexadecimal
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F

Binary
0100 0000
0100 0001
0100 0010
0100 0011
0100 0100
0100 0101
0100 0110
0100 0111
0100 1000
0100 1001
0100 1010
0100 1011
0100 1100
0100 1101
0100 1110
0100 1111
0101 0000
0101 0001
0101 0010
0101 0011
0101 0100
0101 0101
0101 0110
0101 0111
0101 1000
0101 1001
0101 1010
0101 1011
0101 1100
0101 1101
0101 1110
0101 1111
0110 0000
0110 0001
0110 0010
0110 0011
0110 0100
0110 0101
0110 0110
0110 0111
0110 1000
0110 1001
0110 1010
0110 1011
0110 1100
0110 1101
0110 1110
0110 1111
0111 0000
0111 0001
0111 0010
0111 0011
0111 0100
0111 0101
0111 0110
0111 0111
0111 1000
0111 1001
0111 1010
0111 1011
0111 1100
0111 1101
0111 1110
0111 1111

• Except the table above, for example 144-159 (decimal)/9nH/1001 0000-1001
1111 (binary) displays the Note On Message for each channel (1-16). 176191/BnH/1011 0000-1011 1111 displays the Control Change Message for
each channel (1-16). 192-207/CnH/1100 0000-1100 1111 displays the
Program Change Message for each channel (1-16). 240/FOH/1111 0000
denotes the start of a System Exclusive Message. 247/F7H/1111 0111
denotes the end of a System Exclusive Message.
• aaH (hexidecimal)/0aaaaaaa (binary) denotes the data address. The address
contains High, Mid, and Low.
• bbH/0bbbbbbb denotes the byte count.
• ccH/0ccccccc denotes the check sum.
• ddH/0ddddddd denotes the data/value.

110

(1) TRANSMIT FLOW
MIDI ← NOTE ON/OFF
OUT
CONTROL CHANGE
BANK SELECT MSB
BANK SELECT LSB
DATA ENTRY MSB
DATA ENTRY LSB
MAIN VOLUME
PANPOT
EXPRESSION
SUSTAIN
SOSTENUTE
SOFT PEDAL
REVERB SEND LEVEL
VARIATION SEND LEVEL
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
PITCH BEND SENS
PROGRAM CHANGE
PITCH BEND

9nH
BnH
BnH,00H
BnH,20H
BnH,06H
BnH,26H
BnH,07H
BnH,0AH
BnH,0BH
BnH,40H
BnH,42H
BnH,43H
BnH,5BH
BnH,5EH
BnH, 64H
BnH, 65H
BnH, 65H, 00H, 64H, 00H, 06H, mmH
CnH
EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

UNIVERSAL REALTIME
F0H 7FH.....F7H
UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 7EH.....F7H

XG PARAMETER CHANGE
F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH
.....ddH F7H
XG BULK DUMP
F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH
aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H
SPECIAL OPERATORS
SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
MIDI CLOCK
START
STOP
ACTIVE SENSING

F8H
FAH
FCH
FEH

(2) RECEIVE FLOW
MIDI → NOTE OFF
IN
NOTE ON/OFF
CONTROL CHANGE
BANK SELECT MSB
BANK SELECT LSB
MODULATION
PORTAMENTO TIME
DATA ENTRY MSB
DATA ENTRY LSB
MAIN VOLUME
PANPOT
EXPRESSION
SUSTAIN
PORTAMENTO
SOSTENUTO
SOFT PEDAL
HARMONIC CONTENT
RELEASE TIME
ATTACK TIME
BRIGHTNESS
PORTAMENTO CONTROL
REVERB SEND LEVEL
CHORUS SEND LEVEL
VARIATION SEND LEVEL
DATA INCREMENT
DATA DECREMENT
NRPN LSB
NRPN MSB
VIBRATO RATE
VIBRATO DEPTH
VIBRATO DELAY
FILTER CUTOFF FREQ.
FILTER RESONANCE
AEG ATTACK TIME
AEG DECAY TIME
AEG RELEASE
DRUM INST
CUTOFF FREQ.
FILTER RESONANCE
AEG ATTACK RATE
AEG DECAY RATE
PITCH COARSE

8nH
9nH

BnH,00H
BnH,20H
BnH,01H
BnH,05H
BnH,06H
BnH,26H
BnH,07H
BnH,0AH
BnH,0BH
BnH,40H
BnH,41H
BnH,42H
BnH,43H
BnH,47H
BnH,48H
BnH,49H
BnH,4AH
BnH,54H
BnH,5BH
BnH,5DH
BnH,5EH
BnH,60H
BnH,61H
BnH,62H
BnH,63H
BnH,63H,01H,62H,08H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,09H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,0AH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,20H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,21H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,63H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,64H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,01H,62H,66H,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,14H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,15H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,16H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,17H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,18H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

PITCH FINE
LEVEL
PANPOT
REVERB SEND
CHORUS SEND
VARIATION SEND
RPN LSB
RPN MSB
PITCH BEND SENS.
FINE TUNING

BnH,63H,19H,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,1AH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,1CH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,1DH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,1EH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,63H,1FH,62H,rrH,06H,mmH
BnH,64H
BnH,65H
BnH,65H,00H,64H,00H,06H,mmH
BnH,65H,00H,64H,01H,06H,mmH,
26H,llH
BnH,65H,00H,64H,02H,06H,mmH
BnH,65H,7FH,64H,7FH
BnH,78H,00H
BnH,79H,00H
BnH,7BH
BnH,7CH
BnH,7DH
BnH,7EH
BnH,7FH

COARSE TUNING
NULL
ALL SOUND OFF
RESET ALL CONTROLLERS
ALL NOTES OFF
OMNI OFF
OMNI ON
MONO
POLY
PROGRAM CHANGE

CnH

CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH

DnH

PITCH BEND CHANGE

EnH

SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

UNIVERSAL REALTIME
F0H 7FH.....F7H
UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME F0H 4EH.....F7H

XG PARAMETER CHANGE
F0H 43H 1nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH ddH
.....ddH F7H
XG BULK DUMP
F0H 43H 0nH 4CH bbH bbH aaH aaH
aaH ddH.....ddH ccH F7H
PARAMETER REQUEST
F0H 43H 3nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H
DUMP REQUEST
F0H 43H 2nH 4CH aaH aaH aaH F7H
SPECIAL OPERATORS
Others
SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE
MIDI CLOCK
START
STOP
ACTIVE SENSING

F8H
FAH
FCH
FEH

(3) TRANSMIT/RECEIVE DATA
(3-1) CHANNEL VOICE MESSAGES
(3-1-1) NOTE OFF (Recive only)
STATUS
NOTE NUMBER
VELOCITY

1000nnnn (8nH)
0kkkkkkk
0vvvvvvv

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)
v: ignored

(3-1-2) NOTE ON/OFF
STATUS
NOTE NUMBER
VELOCITY

1001nnnn (9nH)
0kkkkkkk
0vvvvvvv
00000000

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
k = 0 (C-2) - 127 (G8)
(v ≠ 0) NOTE ON
(v = 0) NOTE OFF

(3-1-3) PROGRAM CHANGE
STATUS
1100nnnn (CnH)
PROGRAM NUMBER 0ppppppp

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
p = 0 - 127

* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG DRUM VOICE number correspondence
P=0
Standard Kit
P=1
Standard2 Kit
P=8
Room Kit
P = 16
Rock Kit
P = 24
Elctrnic Kit
P = 25
Analog Kit
P = 27
Dance Kit
P = 32
Jazz Kit
P = 40
Brush Kit
P = 48
Classic Kit
* PROGRAM NUMBER: XG SFX KIT number correspondence
P=1
SFX1 Kit
P=2
SFX2 Kit
When DRUM VOICE is selected and program change data for a different DRUM
VOICE is received, the currently selected DRUM VOICE will be replaced with the
new DRUM VOICE.

(3-1-4) CHANNEL AFTER TOUCH (Recive only)
STATUS
VALUE

1101nnnn (DnH) n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
0vvvvvvv
v = 0 - 127 AFTER TOUCH VALUE

(3-1-5) PITCH BEND CHANGE
STATUS
LSB
MSB

1110nnnn (EnH)
0vvvvvvv
0vvvvvvv

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
PITCH BEND CHANGE LSB
PITCH BEND CHANGE MSB

(3-1-6) CONTROL CHANGE
STATUS
CONTROL NUMBER
CONTROL VALUE

1011nnnn (BnH)
0ccccccc
0vvvvvvv

* Transmit CONTROL NUMBER.
c=0
BANK SELECT MSB

c = 32
c= 6
c = 38
c= 7
c = 10
c = 11
c = 64
c = 66
c = 67
c = 91
c = 94

0:XG NORMAL,
64:SFX NORMAL,
126:XG SFX KIT,
127:XG DRUM
BANK SELECT LSB
; v = 0 - 127
DATA ENTRY MSB
; v = 0 - 127
DATA ENTRY LSB
; v = 0 - 127
MAIN VOLUME
; v = 0 - 127
PANPOT
; v = 0 - 127
EXPRESSION
; v = 0 - 127
SUSTAIN
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
SOSTENUTO
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
SOFT PEDAL
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127
VARIATION SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127

* Receive CONTROL NUMBER.
c= 0
BANK SELECT MSB

c = 32
c= 1
c= 5
c= 6
c = 38
c= 7
c = 10
c = 11
c = 64
c = 65
c = 66
c = 67
c = 71
c = 72
c = 73
c = 74
c = 84
c = 91
c = 93
c = 94
c = 96
c = 97

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER

;v=

*3
*1
*1

*2
*2
*2

;v=

0:XG NORMAL,
64:SFX NORMAL,
126:XG SFX KIT,
127:XG DRUM
BANK SELECT LSB
; v = 0 - 127
*3
MODULATION
; v = 0 - 127
*2
PORTAMENTO TIME
; v = 0 - 127
*2
DATA ENTRY MSB
; v = 0 - 127
*1
DATA ENTRY LSB
; v = 0 - 127
*1
MAIN VOLUME
; v = 0 - 127
PANPOT
; v = 0 - 127
EXPRESSION
; v = 0 - 127
SUSTAIN
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
PORTAMENTO
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
SOSTENUTO
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
SOFT PEDAL
; v = 0-63:OFF , 64-127:ON
*2
HARMONIC CONTENT ; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
*2
RELEASE TIME
; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
*2
ATTACK TIME
; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
*2
BRIGHTNESS
; v = 0:-64 - 64:0 - 127:+63
*2
PORTAMENT CONTROL ; v = 0 - 127
*2
REVERB SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127
CHORUS SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127
VARIATION SEND LEVEL ; v = 0 - 127
(When only Connection = 1[System])
DATA INCREMENT
; v = 127
*1
DATA DECREMENT
; v = 127
*1

*1 Only when setting the appointed parameter with RPN, NRPN.
*2 Does not effect Rhythm Voice.
*3 MSB=0, anything other than 63 is 0.

• Until a PROGRAM CHANGE message is received, the BANK SELECT
operation will be suspended. When a Voice, including VOICE BANK, is
changed, set the BANK SELECT and Program Change Message, and
transmit in the following order, BANK SELECT MSB, LSB, PROGRAM
CHANGE.
• MODULATION controls the Vibrato Depth.
• PORTAMENTO TIME controls the Pitch Change Speed when the
Portamento Switch = ON. 0 being the shortest time, and 127 being the
longest.
• PANPOT changes the value for the melody voice and rhythm voice in
relation to the preset value.
• Portamento time is fixed to 0 when the PORTAMENTO CONTROL is
used.
• HARMONIC CONTENT applies adjustment to the resonance value that
is set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the
value of 64 producing 0 adjustment. As values get higher the sound
becomes increasingly eccentric. Note that for some voices the effective
parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range.
• RELEASE TIME applies adjustment to the envelope release time set by
the voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64
producing 0 adjustment.

111

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

• ATTACK TIME applies adjustment to the envelope attack time set by the
voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64
producing 0 adjustment.
• BRIGHTNESS applies adjustment to the cut-off frequency set by the
voice. This parameter specifies relative change with the value of 64
producing 0 adjustment. Lower voices produce a softer sound. For some
voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal
parameter range.
(3-2) CHANNEL MODE MESSAGES
STATUS
1011nnnn (BnH)
CONTROL NUMBER 0ccccccc
CONTROL VALUE
0vvvvvvv

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
c = CONTROL NUMBER
v = DATA VALUE

(3-2-1) ALL SOUND OFF (Recive only)
(CONTROL NUMBER = 78H , DATA VALUE = 0)
Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note On and Hold On
conditions established by Channel Messages.

(3-2-2) RESET ALL CONTROLLERS (Recive only)
(CONTROL NUMBER = 79H , DATA VALUE = 0)
Resets controllers as follows.
PITCH BEND CHANGE
AFTER TOUCH
MODULATION
EXPRESSION
SUSTAIN
SOSTENUTO
SOFT PEDAL
NRPN
RPN
PORTAMENT CONTROL
PORTAMENTO

0 (Center)
0 (min.)
0 (min.)
127 (max.)
0 (off)
0 (off)
0 (off)
Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)
Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged)
Resets portamento source note number
0 (off)

(3-2-3) ALL NOTES OFF (Recive only)
(CONTROL NUMBER = 7BH , DATA VALUE = 0)
Switches off all of the channel’s “on” notes. However, any notes being held by
SUSTAIN or SOSTENUTO continue to sound until SUSTAIN/SOSTENUTO goes off.

(3-2-4) OMNI OFF (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7CH , DATA VALUE = 0)
Same processing as for All Notes Off.

(3-2-5) OMNI ON (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7DH , DATA VALUE = 0)
Same processing as for All Notes Off. Omni On is not executed.

(3-2-6) MONO (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7EH , DATA VALUE = 0-16)
Same processing as for All Notes Off. If the 3rd byte is in a range of 0-16 the
corresponding channel will be changed to Mode 4 (m=1).

(3-2-7) POLY (Recive only) (CONTROL NUMBER = 7FH , DATA VALUE = 0)
Same processing as for All Sounds Off and the corresponding channel will be
changed to Mode 3.

(3-3) REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (RPN)
STATUS
RPN LSB
RPN LSB NUMBER
RPN MSB
RPN MSB NUMBER
DATA ENTRY MSB
DATA VALUE
DATA ENTRY LSB
DATA VALUE

1011nnnn (BnH)
01100100 (64H)
0ppppppp
01100101 (65H)
0qqqqqqq
00000110 (06H)
0mmmmmmm
00100110 (26H)
0lllllll

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
p = RPN LSB (refer to the list below)
q = RPN MSB (refer to the list below)
m = Data Value
l = Data Value

First appoints the parameter for RPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for
data entry MSB/LSB.
RPN
LSB MSB
00H 00H
01H 00H

D.ENTRY
MSB LSB PARAMETER NAME
DATA RANGE
mmH —
PITCH BEND SENSITIVITY 00H - 18H (0 - 24 semitones)
mmH llH FINE TUNE
{mmH,llH} = {00H,00H} - {40H,00H} - {7FH,7FH}
(-8192*100/8192) - 0 - (+8192*100/8192)
02H 00H mmH —
COARSE TUNE
28H - 40H - 58H (-24 - 0 - +24 semitones)
7FH 7FH —
—
NULL
Clears the current RPN number setting. Does not change the internal parameter settings.

First appoints the parameter for NRPN MSB/LSB, then sets the parameter value for data
entry MSB/LSB.
NRPN
MSB LSB
01H 08H
01H 09H
01H 0AH
01H 20H
01H 21H
01H 63H
01H 64H
01H 66H
14H rrH
15H rrH
16H rrH
17H rrH
18H rrH
19H rrH
1AH rrH
1CH rrH

D.ENTRY
MSB LSB
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —
mmH —

1DH rrH
1EH rrH
1FH rrH

mmH —
mmH —
mmH —

1011nnnn (BnH)
01100010 (62H)
0ppppppp
01100011 (63H)
0qqqqqqq
00000110 (06H)
0mmmmmmm

(3-5) SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGES
(3-5-1) MIDI CLOCK
STATUS

11111000 (F8H)

Transmission: 96 clocks per measure are transmitted.
Reception: If the instrument’s clock is set to external, after FAH is received from the
external device the instrument’s clock will sync with the 96 beats per measure
received from the external device.
Decides whether the internal clock, or Timing Clocks received via the MIDI IN will
be used.

(3-5-2) START
STATUS

11111010 (FAH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Auto accompaniment or Song
playback is started.
Reception: Depending upon the condition, Auto accompaniment, Song Playback, or
Song Rec will start. FAH can only be received when External Clock is ON.

(3-5-3) STOP
STATUS

11111100 (FCH)

Transmission: Transmitted when instrument’s Rhythm or Song playback is stopped.
Reception: Depending upon the condition, Rhythm, Song Playback, or Song Rec will
stop.

(3-5-4) ACTIVE SENSING
STATUS

11111110 (FEH)

Transmission: Transmitted approximately once every 200msec.
Reception: Sensing is started once this Code is received. If Status or Data is not
received within 400ms, the MIDI Receive Buffer will be cleared, and all notes,
including those being sustained, will be cut OFF. Also, all control values will be reset
to their factory defaults.

(3-6) SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE
(3-6-1) YAMAHA MIDI FORMAT
(3-6-1-1) SECTION CONTROL
binary
11110000
01000011
01111110
00000000
0sssssss

hexadecimal
F0
43
7E
00
SS

0ddddddd
11110111

DD
F7

n = 0 - 15 VOICE CHANNEL NUMBER
p = NRPN LSB (refer to the list below)
q = NRPN MSB (refer to the list below)

DATA RANGE
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
00H - 7FH (0 - max.)
00H ,01H - 40H - 7FH
(random,left - center - right)
DRUM REVERB SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)
DRUM CHORUS SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)
DRUM VARIATION SEND LEVEL 00H - 7FH (0 - max.)

The MSG14H-1FH (for drums) message is accepted as long as the channel is set
with a drum voice.
rrH : drum instrument note number

(3-4) NON-REGISTERED PARAMETER NUMBER (NRPN) (Recive only)
STATUS
NRPN LSB
NRPN LSB NUMBER
NRPN MSB
NRPN MSB NUMBER
DATA ENTRY MSB
DATA VALUE

PARAMETER NAME
VIBRATO RATE
VIBRATO DEPTH
VIBRATO DELAY
FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY
FILTER RESONANCE
EG ATTACK TIME
EG DECAY TIME
EG RELEASE
DRUM FILTER CUTOFF FREQ.
DRUM FILTER RESONANCE
DRUM AEG ATTACK RATE
DRUM AEG DECAY RATE
DRUM PITCH COARSE
DRUM PITCH FINE
DRUM LEVEL
DRUM PANPOT

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Style
Switch No.
00H
: INTRO A
01H~07H : INTRO B
08H
: MAIN A
09H~0FH : MAIN B
10H
: FILL IN AA
11H~17H : FILL IN BB
18H
: FILL IN AB
19H~1FH : FILL IN BA
20H
: ENDING A
21H~27H : ENDING B
Switch On/Off : 00H (Off),7FH (On)
End of Exclusive

m = Data Value

When an ON code is received, the appointed section will be changed.

112

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

(3-6-1-2) TEMPO CONTROL
binary
11110000
01000011
01111110
00000000
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
0ttttttt
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
7E
01
TT
TT
TT
TT
F7

(3-6-3-1-2) XG PARMETER CHANGE
Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Style
Tempo4
Tempo3
Tempo2
Tempo1
End of Exclusive

The internal clock will be set to the received Tempo value.
Tempo Meta Event is a large data block (24-bit), it is divided into 4 groups with 7-bits
going into each of the Tempos 1-4 (4 receives the remaining 3 bits).

(3-6-2) UNIVERSAL SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE
(3-6-2-1) UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE
(3-6-2-1-1) MIDI MASTER VOLUME (Recive only)
binary
11110000
01111110
01111111
00001001
00000001
0sssssss
0ttttttt
11110111
or
11110000
01111110
0xxxnnnn

hexadecimal
F0
7F
7F
04
01
SS
TT
F7

00001001
00000001
0sssssss
0ttttttt
11110111

04
01
SS
TT
F7

F0
7F
XN

Exclusive status
Universal Realtime
ID of target Device
Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
Volume LSB
Volume MSB
End of Exclusive
Exclusive status
Universal Realtime
When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.
When N is transmitted N always=0.
X = don’t care
Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message
Sub-ID #2=Master Volume
Volume LSB
Volume MSB
End of Exclusive

The volume for all channels will be changed simultaneously.
The TT value is used as the MIDI Master Volume value. (the ss value is ignored.)

(3-6-2-2) UNIVERSAL NON REALTIME MESSAGE
(3-6-2-2-1) GENERAL MIDI SYSTEM ON
binary
11110000
01111110
01111111
00001001
00000001
11110111
or
11110000
01111110
0xxxnnnn

hexadecimal
F0
7E
7F
09
01
F7

00001001
00000001
11110111

09
01
F7

F0
7E
XN

Exclusive status
Universal Non-Realtime
ID of target Device
Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
End of Exclusive
Exclusive status
Universal Non-Realtime
When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.
When N is transmitted N always=0.
X = don’t care
Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message
Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On
End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the System Mode will be changed to XG.
Except MIDI Master Tuning, all control data be reset to default values.
This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be
allowed before the next message is sent.
The bank select message for the channel 10 and the NRPN messages are not received
in the GM mode.

(3-6-3) XG STANDARD
(3-6-3-1) XG PARAMETER CHANGE
(3-6-3-1-1) XG SYSTEM ON
binary
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
01001100
00000000
00000000
01111110
00000000
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
1N
4C
00
00
7E
00
F7

binary
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0ddddddd
|
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
1N
4C
AA
AA
AA
DD
|
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
End of Exclusive

For parameters with data size of 2 or 4, transmit the appropriate number of data bytes.
For more information on Address and Parameters, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-6 >
(pages 115 ~ 118).
The 4 data types listed below are transmitted and received.
(These are transmitted only after a Parameter change request is received.)
XG System Data
Multi Effect Data
Multi Part Data
Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-2) XG BULK DUMP
binary
11110000
01000011
0000nnnn
01001100
0bbbbbbb
0bbbbbbb
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0ddddddd
|
0ccccccc
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
0N
4C
BB
BB
AA
AA
AA
DD
|
CC
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
ByteCount
ByteCount
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
Check sum
End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count, refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-6 >
(pages 115 ~ 118).
The Check Sum value is set such that the sum of Byte Count, Address, Data, and
Check Sum has value zero in its seven least significant bits.
If the top of the block is appointed to the Address the XG Bulk Dump, Bulk Request
will be received.
The Block is a unit that consists of the data, arranged in the list, as the Total Size.
The 5 data types listed below are transmitted and received.
(These are transmitted only after a Bulk Dump request is received.)
System Data
Multi Effect Data (Individual effect unit)
Multi Part Data (Individual part unit)
Drums Setup Data (Individual note unit)
System Information (Individual only)

(3-6-3-3) XG PARAMETER REQUEST (Recive only)
binary
11110000
01000011
0011nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
3n
4C
AA
AA
AA
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-6 >
(pages 115 ~ 118).
The 4 data types listed below are received.
System Data
Multi Effect Data
Multi Part Data
Drums Setup Data

(3-6-3-4) XG DUMP REQUEST (Recive only)
Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
Data
End of Exclusive

Depending upon the received ON message, the SYSTEM MODE will be changed to
XG.Controllers will be reset, all values of Multi Part and Effect, and All System values
denoted by “XG” data within All System will be reset to default values in the table.
This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be
allowed before the next message is sent.

binary
11110000
01000011
0010nnnn
01001100
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
0aaaaaaa
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
2n
4C
AA
AA
AA
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Device Number
Model ID
Address High
Address Mid
Address Low
End of Exclusive

For more information on Address and Byte Count refer to < Table 1-2 > ~ < Table 1-6 >
(pages 115 ~ 118).

113

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

The 5 data types listed below are received.
System Data
Multi Effect Data (Individual module unit)
Multi Part Data (Individual part unit)
Drums Setup Data (Individual note unit)
System Information

(3-6-4) SPECIAL OPERATORS
(3-6-4-1) VOLUME ,EXPRESSION AND PAN REALTIME CONTROL OFF
binary
11110000
01000011
01110011
01000101
00010001
0000nnnn
01001001
0vvvvvvv
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
73
45
11
0N
45
VV
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Clavinova ID
CVP-98/96/94/92 ID
Sub ID
N = MIDI Channel
Volume and Expression Realtime Control Off
Value VV: 00H=on, 7FH=off
End of Exclusive

When “On” is received, subsequent volume, expression, and PAN changes are only
valid after the reception of the next key on. Normal operation resumes when “Off” is
received.

(3-6-5) Others
(3-6-5-1) MIDI MASTER TUNING (Recive only)
binary
11110000
01000011
0001nnnn
00100111
00110000
00000000
00000000
0mmmmmmm
0lllllll
0ccccccc
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
1N
27
30
00
00
MM
LL
CC
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
When N is received N=0-F, whichever is received.
Model ID
Sub ID

Master Tune MSB
Master Tune LSB
don’t care
End of Exclusive

Changes tuning of all channels.
MM, LL values are used to define the MIDI Master Tuning value.

(3-6-5-2) Bulk Dump
User Song, User Style
binary
11110000
01000011
01110011
01001011
00110000
0kkkkkkk
0000llll
0000llll
0000llll
0000llll
0000llll
0000llll
0ddddddd
:
0ccccccc
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
73
4B
06
KK
0L
0L
0L
0L
0L
0L
DD
:
CC
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Clavinova ID
Model ID (PSR-530)
Bulk ID
Bulk No. (0AH;User Song, 07H;User Style)
Data Length
Data Length
Data Length
Data Length
Data Length
Data Length (Date Length=LLLLLL HByte
Bulk Data
Check Sum
End of Exclusive

Multi Pad, Registration Memory
binary
11110000
01000011
01110011
01001011
00110000
0kkkkkkk
0000llll
0000llll
0000llll
0000llll
0ddddddd
:
0ccccccc
11110111

hexadecimal
F0
43
73
4B
06
KK
0L
0L
0L
0L
DD
:
CC
F7

Exclusive status
YAMAHA ID
Clavinova ID
Model ID (PSR-530)
Bulk ID
Bulk No.(08H;Multi Pad, 09H;Registration Memory)
Data Length
Data Length
Data Length
Data Length (Date Length=LLLL HByte)
Bulk Data
Check Sum
End of Exclusive

Bulk data cannot be sent when:
• in the Record Modes (Song, Style, Pad).
• song playback.
• accompaniment playback.
• multi pad playback.
• changing the registration number.

T = M-128
T : Tuning value (-100cent - +100cent)
M : A single byte value (28-228) consists of bytes 0-3 of MM = MSB, bytes 0-3 of LL = LSB.
In this setting, GM System ON, XG System ON will not be reset.

Bulk data cannot be received when:
• in the Record Modes (Song, Style, Pad).
• a frame appears around the voice icons and an user song is selected.
• song playback.
• accompaniment playback.
• multi pad playback.
• changing the registration number.

< Table 1-1> Parmeter Basic Address

SYSTEM

Parameter Change
Address
(H) (M) (L)
00 00 00
00 00 7D
00 00 7E
00 00 7F

Description
System
Drum Setup Reset
XG System On
All Parameter Reset

INFORMATION

01 00

System Information

EFFECT 1

02 01

Effect1 (Reverb,Chorus,Variation)

MULTI PART

08 00

Multi Part 1

08 0F

00
:
00

Multi Part 16

08 10
:
:

00
:

Reserved
:

DRUM

114

30 0B 00
31 0B 00

Drum Setup 1 → Address
Drum Setup 2
:
3n 0B 00
3n 0C 00
:
3n 5B 00

Parameter
:
note number 13
note number 14
:
note number 91

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

< Table 1-2 > MIDI Parameter Change table (SYSTEM) (With XG, GM On, it will not reset.)
Address
(H)
00 00

00
01
02
03

04
05
06
7D
7E
7F
TOTAL SIZE 6

Size
(H)
4

Data
(H)
0000
..07FF

Parameter Name

Description

Master Tune

1
1
1

00..7F

Master Volume
Not Used
Transpose
Drum Setup Reset
XG System On
All Parameter Reset

-102.4..+102.3[cent]
1st bit3-0 -> bit15-12
2nd bit3-0 -> bit11-8
3rd bit3-0 -> bit7-4
4th bit3-0 -> bit3-0
0..127

28..58
n
00
00

-24..+24[semitones]
n=Drum Setup Number
00=XG Sytem on
00=on (receive only)

Default
Value (H)
00 04 00 00
(0400)
(With XG, GM On, it will not reset.)

7F
40

< Table 1-3 > MIDI Parameter table (System information) (Transmitted by Dump Request. Not received. Bulk Dump Only)
Address
(H)
01 00

Size
(H)
E

Data
(H)
20..7F

Parameter Name

00
Model Name
:
0D
0E
1
00
0F
1
00
TOTAL SIZE 10
(Transmitted by Dump Request. Not received. Bulk Dump Only)

Description
32..127 (ASCII)

< Table 1-4 > MIDI Parameter Change table (EFFECT 1)
Address
(H)
02 01

02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
TOTAL SIZE 0E

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Data
(H)
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
01..7F

10
11
12
13
14
15
TOTAL SIZE 6

1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Reverb Parameter 11
Reverb Parameter 12
Reverb Parameter 13
Reverb Parameter 14
Reverb Parameter 15
Reverb Parameter 16

Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List

Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
01..7F
00..7F

Chorus Type MSB
Chorus Type LSB
Chorus Parameter 1
Chorus Parameter 2
Chorus Parameter 3
Chorus Parameter 4
Chorus Parameter 5
Chorus Parameter 6
Chorus Parameter 7
Chorus Parameter 8
Chorus Parameter 9
Chorus Parameter 10
Chorus Return
Chorus Pan
Send Chorus To Reverb

00
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
60
40
00

22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
TOTAL SIZE 0F

Size
(H)
2

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Parameter Name

Description

Reverb Type MSB
Reverb Type LSB
Reverb Parameter 1
Reverb Parameter 2
Reverb Parameter 3
Reverb Parameter 4
Reverb Parameter 5
Reverb Parameter 6
Reverb Parameter 7
Reverb Parameter 8
Reverb Parameter 9
Reverb Parameter 10
Reverb Return
Reverb Pan

Default
Value (H)
01 (=HALL1)
00
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
Depend on Reverb type
60
40

115

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

Address
(H)
02 01

Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1
1

Data
(H)
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Parameter Name

Description

Chorus Parameter 11
Chorus Parameter 12
Chorus Parameter 13
Chorus Parameter 14
Chorus Parameter 15
Chorus Parameter 16

Default
Value (H)
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type
Depend on Chorus Type

2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
01..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..01
00..1F
01..7F
01..7F
01..7F
01..7F
01..7F

Variation Type MSB
Variation Type LSB
Vari. Param. 1 MSB
Vari. Param. 1 LSB
Vari. Param. 2 MSB
Vari. Param. 2 LSB
Vari. Param. 3 MSB
Vari. Param. 3 LSB
Vari. Param. 4 MSB
Vari. Param. 4 LSB
Vari. Param. 5 MSB
Vari. Param. 5 LSB
Vari. Param. 6 MSB
Vari. Param. 6 LSB
Vari. Param. 7 MSB
Vari. Param. 7 LSB
Vari. Param. 8 MSB
Vari. Param. 8 LSB
Vari. Param. 9 MSB
Vari. Param. 9 LSB
Vari. Param. 10 MSB
Vari. Param. 10 LSB
Variation Return
Variation Pan
Send Vari. To Reverb
Send Vari. To Chorus
Variation Connection
Variation Part
MW Vari. Ctrl Depth
PB Vari. Ctrl Depth
CAT Vari. Ctrl Depth
Not Used
Not Used

Refer to the Effect Type List
: basic type
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
Refer to the Effect Parameter List
-∞..0..+6dB (0..96..127)
L63..C..R63 (1..64..127)
-∞..0..+6dB (0..96..127)
-∞..0..+6dB (0..96..127)
0:insertion,1:system
part1..32 (0..31),off (127)
-63..+63
-63..+63
-63..+63

00
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
Depend on Vari. Type
60
40
00
00
00
7F
40
40
40

1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Variation Parameter 11
Variation Parameter 12
Variation Parameter 13
Variation Parameter 14
Variation Parameter 15
Variation Parameter 16

option Parameter
option Parameter
option Parameter
option Parameter
option Parameter
option Parameter

Depend on Variation Type
Depend on Variation Type
Depend on Variation Type
Depend on Variation Type
Depend on Variation Type
Depend on Variation Type

30
31
32
33
34
35
TOTAL SIZE 6
02

56
57
58
59
5A
5B
5C
5D
5E
5F
60
TOTAL SIZE 21
02

70
71
72
73
74
75
TOTAL SIZE 6

< Table 1-5 > MIDI Parameter Change table (MULTI PART)
Address
(H)
08 nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

00
01
02
03
04

Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1

nn
nn

05
06

1
1

Data
(H)
00..20
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..0F,
7F
00..01
00..02

00..02

Part Mode

nn
nn
nn

08
09
0A

1
2

28..58
00..FF

Note Shift
Detune

nn
nn
nn
nn

0B
0C
0D
0E

1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Volume
Velocity Sense Depth
Velocity Sense Offset
Pan

116

Parameter Name

Description

Element Reserve
Bank Select MSB
Bank Select LSB
Program Number
Rcv Channel

0..32
0..127
0..127
1..128
0..16;1..16,127;off

Mono/Poly Mode
Same Note Number
Key On Assign

0:mono,1:poly
0:single
1:multi
2:inst (for DRUM)
0:normal
1:drum,drumS1..2
-24..+24[semitones]
-12.8..+12.7[Hz]
1st bit3..0 -> bit7..4
2nd bit3..0 -> bit3..0
0..127
0..127
0..127
0:random
L63..C..R63 (1..64..127)

Default
Value (H)
0 (Part10),2 (Others)
7F (Part10),00 (Others)
00
00
Part No.
01
00

00 (Except Part 10.)
02 (Part10)
40
08 00
(80)
64
40
40
40

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

Address
(H)
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

Data
(H)
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Parameter Name

Description

0F
10
11
12
13
14

Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1
1

Note Limit Low
Note Limit High
Dry Level
Chorus Send
Reverb Send
Variation Send

C-2..G8
C-2..G8
0..127
0..127
0..127
0..127

Default
Value (H)
00
7F
7F
00
28
00

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Vibrato Rate
Vibrato Depth
Vibrato Delay
Filter Cutoff Freq.
Filter Resonance
EG Attack Time
EG Decay Time
EG Release Time

-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63
-64..+63

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

1D
1E
1F
20
21
22

1
1
1
1
1
1

28..58
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

MW Pitch Control
MW Filter Control
MW Amp. Control
MW LFO PMod Depth
MW LFO FMod Depth
MW LFO AMod Depth

-24..+24[semitones]
-9600..+9450[cent]
-100..+100[%]
0..127
0..127
0..127

40
40
40
0A
00
00

1
1
1
1
1
1

28..58
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Bend Pitch Control
Bend Filter Control
Bend Amp. Control
Bend LFO PMod Depth
Bend LFO FMod Depth
Bend LFO AMod Depth

-24..+24[semitones]
-9600..+9450[cent]
-100..+100[%]
0..127
0..127
0..127

42
40
40
00
00
00

nn 23
nn 24
nn 25
nn 26
nn 27
nn 28
TOTAL SIZE 29
nn
nn

30
:
40

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Scale Tuning C
Scale Tuning C#
Scale Tuning D
Scale Tuning D#
Scale Tuning E
Scale Tuning F
Scale Tuning F#
Scale Tuning G
Scale Tuning G#
Scale Tuning A
Scale Tuning A#
Scale Tuning B

-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]
-64..+63[cent]

40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40

nn
nn
nn
nn
nn
nn

4D
4E
4F
50
51
52

1
1
1
1
1
1

28..58
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

CAT Pitch Control
CAT Filter Control
CAT Amplitude Control
CAT LFO PMod Depth
CAT LFO FMod Depth
CAT LFO AMod Depth

-24..+24[semitones]
-9600..+9450[cent]
-100..+100[%]
0..127
0..127
0..127

40
40
40
00
00
00

53
:
66

nn
nn

67
68

off/on
0..127

00
00

69
:
6E
TOTAL SIZE 3F

Not Used
:
Not Used

Not Used
:
Not Used
1
1

00..01
00..7F

Portamento Switch
Portamento Time
Not Used
:
Not Used

nn = PartNumber
If there is a Drum Voice assigned to the Part, the following parameters are ineffective.
• Bank Select LSB
• Amp EG
• Portamento
• Soft Pedal
• Mono/Poly
• Scale Tuning

117

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

< Table 1-6 > MIDI Parameter Change table (DRUM SETUP)
Address
(H)
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr
3n
rr

00
01
02
03
04

3n
rr
05
3n
rr
06
3n
rr
07
3n
rr
08
3n
rr
09
3n
rr 0A
3n
rr
0B
3n
rr
0C
3n
rr 0D
3n
rr
0E
3n
rr
0F
TOTAL SIZE 10

Size
(H)
1
1
1
1
1

Data
(H)
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Parameter Name

Description

Pitch Coarse
Pitch Fine
Level
Alternate Group
Pan

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..01
00..01
00..01
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F
00..7F

Reverb Send Level
Chorus Send Level
Variation Send Level
Key Assign
Rcv Note Off
Rcv Note On
Filter Cutoff Freq.
Filter Resonance
EG Attack Rate
EG Decay1 Rate
EG Decay2 Rate

-64..+63
-64..+63[cent]
0..127
0:off,1..127
0:random
L63..C..R63 (1..64..127)
0..127
0..127
0..127
0:single,1:multi
off/on
off/on
-64..63
-64..63
-64..63
-64..63
-64..63

Default
Value (H)
40
40
Depend on the Note
Depend on the Note
Depend on the Note
Depend on the Note
Depend on the Note
7F
00
Depend on the Note
01
40
40
40
40
40

n:Drum Setup Number (0 - 1)
rr:note number (0DH - 5BH)
If XG SYSTEM ON and/or GM On message is received, all Drum Setup Parameter will be reset to default values.
According to the Drum Setup Reset message, individual Drum Setup Parameters can be reset to default values.

< Table 1-7 > Effect Type List
XG ESSENTIAL EFFECT
Same as LSB=0
XG OPTION EFFECT
* If the received value does not contain an effect type in the TYPE LSB, the LSB will be directed to TYPE 0.
* Panel Effects are based on the “[Number] Effect Name”.
* Using an external sequencer, capable of editing and transmitting the system exclusive messages and parameter changes, allows you to select the reverb, chorus and DSP effect types
which are not accessible from the PSR-530 panel operation. When one of the effects is selected by the external sequencer, “XG Rev.,” “XG Cho.” or “XG Eff.” will be shown on the
display.

REVERB TYPE
TYPE
MSB
000
001
002
003
004
005...015
016
017
018
019
020...127

TYPE LSB
00
NO EFFECT
[1]HALL1
ROOM1
STAGE1
PLATE
NO EFFECT
WHITE ROOM
TUNNEL
CANYON
BASEMENT
NO EFFECT

HALL2
ROOM2
STAGE2

ROOM3

CHORUS2
[4]CHORUS4
[9]FLANGER 4

[5]CHORUS5
CELESTE3

03...07

09...15

[2]HALL2
[5]ROOM1
[9]STAGE1
[11]PLATE1

[3]HALL3
[6]ROOM2
[10]STAGE2
[12]PLATE2

[4]HALL4
[7]ROOM3

[8]ROOM4

[3]CHORUS3
[7]FLANGER2

[1]CHORUS1
[8]FLANGER3

21...

CHORUS TYPE
TYPE
MSB
000
001...064
065
066
067
068...127

118

TYPE LSB
00
NO EFFECT
NO EFFECT
CHORUS1
CELESTE1
FLANGER 1
NO EFFECT

03...07

CHORUS4
[2]CHORUS2
[6]FLANGER1

09...15

¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢¢
QQQQQQQQQQQQQQ
,,,,,,,,,,,,,,
MIDI Data Format

DSP TYPE (0 — 63)
TYPE
MSB
000
001
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012...019
020
021...063

TYPE LSB
00
NO EFFECT
[1]HALL1
ROOM1
STAGE1
PLATE
“DELAY L,C,R”
“[39]DELAY L,R”
[40]ECHO
[41]CROSS DELAY
[13]ER1
[15]GATE REVERB
[16]REVERS GATE
NO EFFECT or
THRU
KARAOKE 1
NO EFFECT or
THRU*

HALL2
ROOM2
STAGE2

ROOM3

03...07

09...15

21...

[2]HALL2
[5]ROOM1
[9]STAGE1
[11]PLATE1
[38]Delay LCR

[3]HALL3
[6]ROOM2
[10]STAGE2
[12]PLATE2

[4]HALL4
[7]ROOM3

[8]ROOM4

21...

[19]CHORUS3
[23]FLANGER2
[26]Symphonic
[28]Rotary Sp1
[33]Tremolo1
[36]AutoPan

[17]CHORUS1
[24]FLANGER3

[32]Rotary Sp5

[34]Tremolo2

[35]Gtr Tremolo

[42]DIST.HARD
[44]EQ DISCO

[43]DIST.SOFT
[45]EQ TEL

[14]ER2

KARAOKE 2

KARAOKE 3

CHORUS2
[20]CHORUS4
[25]FLANGER 4

[21]CHORUS5
CELESTE3

DSP TYPE (64 — 127)
TYPE
MSB
064
065
066
067
068
069
070
071
072
073
074
075
076
077
078
079...127

TYPE LSB
00
THRU
CHORUS1
CELESTE1
FLANGER 1
SYMPHONIC
ROTARY SP.
TREMOLO
AUTO PAN
[27]PHASER
DISTORTION
OVER DRIVE
AMP SIM.
3BAND EQ
2BAND EQ
AUTO WAH
THRU

03...07

09...15

CHORUS4
[18]CHORUS2
[22]FLANGER1

[31]Rotary Sp4
[29]Rotary Sp2

[30]Rotary Sp3

PHASER 2

[37]Auto Wah

< Table 1-8 > Effect Parameter List
HALL1,HALL2, ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3, STAGE1,STAGE2, PLATE (reverb, variation block)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Parameter
Reverb Time
Diffusion
Initial Delay
HPF Cutoff
LPF Cutoff

0.3 — 30.0s
0 — 10
0 — 63
Thru — 8.0kHz
1.0k — Thru

Value
0-69
0-10
0-63
0-52
34-60

11
12
13
14
15
16

Dry/Wet

D63 > W — D=W — D R — E=R — E W — D=W — D R — E=R — E W — D=W — D W — D=W — D W — D=W — D W — D=W — D W — D=W — D R Delay
R -> L Delay
Feedback Level
Input Select
High Damp

Dry/Wet

D63 > W — D=W — D W — D=W — D W — D=W — D W — D=W — D W — D=W — D W — D=W — D R,L -> R,L <- R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R”

Value
0-127
0-127
0-127
0-5

EQ
EQ
EQ
EQ

50Hz — 2.0kHz
–12 — +12dB
500Hz — 16.0kHz
–12 — +12dB

8-40
52-76
28-58
52-76

AUTO PAN (variation block)
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Low Frequency
Low Gain
High Frequency
High Gain

Parameter
Drive
AMP Type
LPF Cutoff
Output Level

Dry/Wet

D63 > W — D=W — D W — D=W — D W — D=W — D W — D=W — D
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.5
Linearized : Yes
Encryption : Standard V1.2 (40-bit)
User Access : Print, Copy, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res
Page Count : 130
Page Mode : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About : uuid:17c46817-f798-4c2a-abe1-edcf170d8714
Keywords :
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 3.0J (Power Macintosh 版)
Modify Date : 2003:07:29 21:29:46+09:00
Create Date : 1997:06:26 17:33:44Z
Creator Tool : Adobe PageMaker 6.0
Metadata Date : 2003:07:29 21:29:46+09:00
Document ID : uuid:81f2a2a8-7f62-4a36-a809-f471a88e5b0e
Format : application/pdf
Title :
Creator :
Description :
Author :
Subject :

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Yamaha Psr 530 Owners Manual

Psr-530-Owners-Manual yamaha-psr-530-owners-manual-133580

PSR-530 Owner's Manual PSR530E

PSR-530 to the manual 8cd22ab7-19a6-4e1d-ac65-1ace31298c5e

Yamaha Corporation PSR-530 Owner's Manual psr530e Yamaha Corporation - PSR-530 - Owner's Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation